e
d
i
u
G
k
c
i
u
Q
DVD / Video Cassette Recorder with DVR (HDD)
EWH100F
1
Connection to a TV
Antenna
Antenna
(Back of TV)
Cable
TV signal
Cable
TV signal
(Back ofTV)
4
3
Plug in the AC power
cord of this unit.
or
or
Connect
RF cable
(supplied)
1
DVR/DVD
COMPONENT
DVR/DVD/VCR
AUDIO IN AUDIO OUT ANTENNA
VIDEO OUT
IN
Disconnect
/DVD
AUDIO
OUT
S-VIDEO
Y
L
L
T
Note
DVR/DVD/VCR
L
PB/CB
R
R
IN
VIDEO IN VIDEO OUT
• You can connect to TV
with A/V cables or RF
cable.
2
R
PR/CR
OUT
OUT
Connect
DVR/DVD
(Back of this unit)
Choose one of the following connections,depending on the capabilities of the equipment you possess.
(V = Available,
-
= Not Available)
Basic Audio Connection
Video Connections
Picture Quality
Basic
V
Good
V
Best
V
TV
OR
OR
DVR/DVD
VCR
Basic Audio
V (required)
-
-
AUDIO IN
(Compatible with
the Progressive
COMPONENT
VIDEO IN
VIDEO IN
S-VIDEO IN
Scan mode)
TV
Y
This unit
PB/CB
PR/CR
OR
Video cable
(supplied)
S-Video cable
(commercially
available)
Component
Audio cable
(supplied)
video cable
(commercially
available)
DVR/DVD/VCR
AUDIO OUT
DVR/DVD
AUDIO
OUT
L
DVR/DVD
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
DVR/DVD/VCR
AUDIO IN AUDIO OUT
DVR/DVD
S-VIDEO
Y
L
L
L
DIGITAL
AUDIO
AUDIO OUT
OUT
R
DVR/DVD/VCR
L
PB/CB
PR/CR
R
R
S-VIDEO
DVR/DVD
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
DVR/DVD/VCR
AUDIO OUT
COAXIAL
IN
VIDEO IN VIDEO OUT
VIDEO OUT
R
OUT
R
Y
L
This unit
DVR/DVD
DVR/DVD/VCR
IN
R
PB/CB
VIDEO OUT
PR/CR
AUDIO OUT
OUT
DVR/DVD
•
These jacks are useful only in
DVR / DVD mode.
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
VIDEO OUT
S-VIDEO OUT
1VMN22053
E434RUD ★★★★★
Recording and Playback Information
3
Recordable disc
Playable discs
Discs which can be used with this recorder:
This unit is compatible with the following discs.
Discs with the following logos can be played back on the
unit. Playback of other disc types is not guaranteed.
• DVD-R disc:up to 16x (4x or 8x disc is recommended)
• DVD-RW disc:2x and 4x (2x disc is recommended)
Disc
Logo
Discs tested and proven to be compatible with this recorder:
DVD-VIDEO
MAXELL DVD-R disc 4x
TDK DVD-RW disc 2x
JVC DVD-RW disc 4x
VERBATIM DVD-R disc 8x
DVD-RW
(VIDEO/VR mode)
DVD-R
(VIDEO mode)
Disc type Disc format Functions
Video mode
Video
Playback, limited
recording, limited editing
CD-DA
(AUDIO CD)
DVD-RW
VR mode
VR
Playback, recording, Original
List / Playlist editing
DVD-RW
CD-RW
DVD-RW
(CD-DA FORMAT, MP3 /WMA files)
Video mode
Playback, limited
recording, limited editing
CD-R
DVD-R
(CD-DA FORMAT, MP3 /WMA files)
DVD-R
DVD players with
recorded inVR mode.
are capable of playing DVD-RW disc
is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing Corporation.
Rec Mode
Color systems
You can select a Rec Mode among six options,and the
recording time and the picture/audio quality of recorded
material depends on the Rec Mode you select.
DVDs are recorded in different color systems throughout
the world. The most common color system is NTSC (which
is used primarily in the United States and Canada).
This unit uses NTSC,you must use DVDs recorded in the
NTSC system. You cannot play back DVDs recorded in oth-
er color systems.
Rec
Mode
Recording
time
Video / Sound
Quality
Disc Size
(good)
XP
SP
18 min
36 min
72 min
108 min
144 min
180 min
8 cm Disc
LP
EP
Region codes
SLP
SEP
(poor)
(good)
DVDs must be labeled forALL regions or for Region 1.
Look for the symbols below on your DVDs.
XP
SP
60 min
120 min
240 min
360 min
480 min
600 min
LP
12 cm Disc
EP
SLP
SEP
(poor)
(good)
XP
SP
17
34
68
H
H
H
LP
DVR
EP
102 H
136 H
170 H
SLP
SEP
(poor)
To select the Rec Mode you prefer,press REC MODE
repeatedly.
Formatting a Disc
4
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
The recording format type you set here will be
memorized and applied to the disc whenever you format
DVD-RW discs.
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
POWER
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
Press SETUP.
1
2
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
Using
/
,select “DVD Menu”.
CHANNEL
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
Press ENTER.
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
Using
Press ENTER.
Option window will appear.
/
,select “DVD Recording Format”.
3
SPACE
0
PROGRAM
SETUP
AUDIO
CLEAR
RECORDINGS
DVD Recording Format
VR
Video
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
Using
Press ENTER.
/
,select “VR” or “Video”.
4
ENTER
DISPLAY
RETURN
Auto Format
VARIABLE VARIABLE
Whenever you load a brand new DVD-RW disc, the
unit will automatically format the disc in the
recording format type you set in this section.
REPLAY
SKIP
SKIP
REV
PLAY
FWD
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
DVD
VCR
DVR
REC MONITOR
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DVR / DVD Recording
5
DVD-R
DVR
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
The following will help you to understand easily how to record to the internal DVR or to DVDs.
Make sure batteries are in the remote control and you have connected this unit and theTV correctly.
Step 1:Choose a disc type & the Recording Format.
or
(Only if you are recording to DVD.)
Step 2:Preparing the media
1Turn on the unit.
2 Select the device you want to use.
(If you are recording to the DVR,
skip to step 3.)
4 Close the disc tray.
3 Open the disc tray,and
place a disc on the tray.
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
POWER
POWER
POWER
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
PROG. SELECT
POWER
PROG. SELECT
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
CHANNEL
DVD
GHI
JKL
MNO
DVR
VCR
REC MONITOR
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
It may take a while to
load the disc.
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
SPACE
0
SPACE
0
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
• If you load a brand new DVD-RW disc, Auto Format will start automatically.
Step 5:Start Recording.
• When recording to the DVR:
Press REC / OTR (DVR).
• When recording to the DVD:
Press REC / OTR (DVD).
DVR MODE
Step 3:Select the Rec Mode.
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
DVD
VCR
DVR
REC MONITOR
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
DVD
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
VCR
DVR
REC MONITOR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DVR
CH8
LP 65:56
I
DVR Rec
0:06:50
CH8
LP 65:56
Step 4:Select the desired channel to
record.
Step 6:Stop Recording.
SKIP
REV
REPLAY
SKIP
DVR MODE
CH
8
PLAY
FWD
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
POWER
PROG. SELECT
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
DVD
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
VCR
DVR
REC MONITOR
CHANNEL
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
IC
DVR Rec Stop
LP 65:56
0:06:50
CH8
SPACE
0
PROGRAM
This operation may take
a while to be recognized.
Note
DVR is a temporary storage location.
•
DVR is not a permanent storage location of the recorded contents. Be sure to use it as a temporary storage location until
you watch the programs once, edit them, or dub them to a DVD disc or a videotape.
80GB Hard Disc
• This unit is equipped with an 80 GB hard disc which allows you to record up to 170 hours (with SEP mode).
Basic Dubbing
6
DVD-R
DVR
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
VCR
Using
Press ENTER.
Program List Menu will appear.
/
,select a desired program.
5
6
We illustrated DVR to DVD dubbing here as an example.
Refer to the Owner’s Manual on how to perform other
types of dubbing.
Press DUBBING MENU.
Add to Dubbing List.
Playlist
1
The Dubbing Direction and the Rec Mode menu will
appear.
Decide
DUBBING
Dubbing Direction
Rec Mode
Using
Press ENTER.
The selected program is now added to the Dubbing List.
/
,select “Add to Dubbing List.”.
High
XP
DVR
DVD
DVR
VCR
DVD
VCR
DVD
DVR
VCR
DVR
VCR
DVD
SP
LP
EP
DUBBING
SLP
SEP
Auto
Program List (Original)
Dubbing List
Title 2
1
Title 1
Title 2
Title 3
Title 4
Title 5
Title 6
Title 7
Title 8
2
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Using
/
,select the desired dubbing direction,
then press ENTER.
Example: DVR ★ DVD
2
DUBBING
Dubbing Direction
Rec Mode
Repeat the steps 5 to 6 until you select all programs
to be dubbed.
High
XP
SP
DVR
DVD
DVR
VCR
DVD
VCR
DVD
DVR
VCR
DVR
VCR
DVD
7
8
LP
EP
After selecting all the programs you want,press
RETURN
to go back to the DubbingTop Menu.
SLP
SEP
Auto
DUBBING
Dubbing List
2
4
Title 2
Title 4
Direction DVR DVD
Mode XP
Using
Press ENTER.
DubbingTop Menu will appear.
/
,select a desired Rec Mode.
3
4
Select Program
Dubbing Start
DUBBING
Dubbing List
Direction DVR DVD
Mode
XP
Using
Press ENTER.
/
,select “Dubbing Start”.
9
Select Program
Dubbing Start
Confirmation window will appear.
Start Dubbing?
Yes
No
Using
Press ENTER.
Program List will appear.
/
,select “Select Program”.
Using
Dubbing will start.
/
,select “Yes”. Press ENTER.
10
DUBBING
Program List (Original)
Dubbing List
• It may take a while to prepare for the dubbing.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Title 1
Title 2
Title 3
Title 4
Title 5
Title 6
Title 7
Title 8
To stop the dubbing while in the dubbing
preparation mode:
• Press the Device Select Button of the recording
media first,then press STOP C.Or,press
STOP/EJECT
C
A on the front panel.
To stop the dubbing in progress:
•
Press the Device Select Button of the recording
media first,then press STOP C and hold it for 2 seconds
or press STOP/EJECT
C
A on the front panel.
Finalize
DVR / DVD Playback
7
8
DVD-R
DVD-R
CD
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
DVR
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
You must first finalize the disc before playing it back on
other unit.
If you are playing the DVR,press DVR first.
If you are playing a disc,press DVD first.
Press SETUP.
1
2
If you are playing the DVR,skip to step 4.
1
2
3
Using
/
,select “DVD Menu”,then press
ENTER.
Press OPEN / CLOSE A to open the disc tray.
Using
/
,select “Finalize”,then press ENTER.
3
Insert the disc with its label facing up. Align the Disc
to the disc tray guide.
Confirmation window will appear.
Finalize disc?
Yes
No
• If the disc has already been finalized, “Undo
Finalize” will be listed in the menu instead of
“Finalize” (DVD-RW only).To Undo the
finalization of the disc, select “Undo Finalize”
and press ENTER.
disc tray guide
Press OPEN / CLOSE A again to close the disc
tray.
Press PLAY B to start playing back a CD.
For DVR / DVD Playback,proceed to step 4.
• It may take a while to load the disc.
Using
/
,select “Yes”,then press ENTER.
4
5
Final confirmation window will appear.
Are you sure?
Yes
No
PressTOP MENU.
4
Title List will appear.
Example: DVR
Using
Finalizing will start.
/
, select “Yes”, then press ENTER.
DVR DVD DVD
PL ORG PL
PREVIOUS RECORDINGS
DVR
ORG
1
2
• If you want to stop the process, press ENTER.
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
CH12 XP
1
2
5
3
6
APR/01/06
12:15PM
MAY/01/06
12:15PM
JUN/04/06
10:00AM
4
JUN/15/06
11:05AM
JUL/05/06
11:40PM
JUL/18/06
10:00AM
Finalize
Cancel
Press MENU / LIST to switch Original List / Playlist
if necessary.
This operation may take a
while to be completed.
Using
PLAY B.
/
/
/
,select a desired title,then press
5
6
Playback will start.
Press STOP C to stop playback.
VCR
9
Basic Recording
VCR
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
Before recording,make sure:
POWER
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
• The desired channel is selected by pressing the
Number Buttons or CHANNEL
• There is a videotape with a record tab in the unit.
• The desired Rec Mode (SP:Standard Play or SLP:Super
Long Play) is selected by pressing REC MODE on the
remote control.
/
.
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
CHANNEL
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
Rec Mode
Tape speed
Type of tape
SP mode
Recording / PlaybackTime
SPACE
0
T60
T120
T160
2-2 / 3 hours 3-1 / 2 hours
8 hours 10-1 / 2 hours
T210
1 hour
3 hours
2 hours
6 hours
PROGRAM
SETUP
AUDIO
CLEAR
RECORDINGS
SLP mode
• Stereo or SAP is selected.
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
Press VCR first.
ENTER
Press REC / OTR (VCR) to begin the recording.
1
2
DISPLAY
RETURN
To temporarily stop recording or to resume it, press
PAUSE F. After the unit has been in pause for five
minutes, it will stop automatically to protect the
videotape and the video head from damage.
VARIABLE VARIABLE
REPLAY
SKIP
SKIP
REV
PLAY
FWD
Press STOP C when the recording is completed.
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
DVD
VCR
DVR
REC MONITOR
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
Accidental erasure prevention
To prevent accidental recording on a
recorded videotape,remove its record tab.
To record on it later,cover the hole with
cellophane tape.
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
Record tab
Basic Playback
VCR
Press VCR first.
Insert a prerecorded videotape. Press PLAY B to
begin playback.
1
• If there is no record tab, playback starts
automatically.
During playback, press PAUSE F.
2
Playback will pause and sound will be muted.
OPEN
/
CLOSE
POWER
STOP/EJECT REW
F.FWD
PLAY
REC/OTR
CHANNEL
DUBBING
VCR
DVR
DVD
STOP
PLAY DVR REC/OTR DVD
VCR
DVD
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
Press PLAY B to resume playback.
DVR
DVD
VCR
DVR/DVD
3
4
5
Press STOP C to stop playback.
POWER
STOP / EJECT C A
Press STOP / EJECT C A on the front panel of the
unit to eject the videotape.
Owner’s Manual
Recordable disc
EMERSONANDTHE G-CLEF LOGOARE REGISTEREDTRADEMARKS
OF EMERSON RADIO CORP.,PARSIPPANY,NEW JERSEY,U.S.A.
Discs which can be used with this recorder:
• DVD-R disc:up to 16x (4x or 8x disc is recommended)
• DVD-RW disc:2x and 4x (2x disc is recommended)
Discs tested and proven to be compatible with this recorder:
MAXELL DVD-R disc 4x
JVC DVD-RW disc 4x
TDK DVD-RW disc 2x
VERBATIM DVD-R disc 8x
DVD /Video Cassette Recorder with DVR (HDD)
EWH100F
OPEN
/
CLOSE
POWER
STOP/EJECT REW
F.FWD
VCR
PLAY
REC/OTR
CHANNEL
DUBBING
VCR
DVR
DVD
STOP
PLAY DVR REC/OTR DVD
VCR
DVD
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
TIME
P-SCAN
DB
VCR
HDD
DVD
PM
SHIFT
DVR
DVD
DVR/DVD
CD
R
W
INSTRUCCIONES EN ESPAÑOL INCLUIDAS.
SuppliedAccessories
•
Remote control
(NB308UD) with two (WPZ0901TM002)
AA batteries
• RF cable
•
Audio /Video cables • Owner’s Manual
• Quick Use Guide • Blank Media
VMN22053 DVD-R disc x
KDDZZZZMB001)
(WPZ0102TM015 or
(1VMN22052)
(1
)
1
WPZ0102LTE01)
(
Owner’s Manual
Please read before using this equipment.
If you need additional operating assistance after reading this owner’s
manual or to order replacement accessories, please call
TOLL FREE:1-800-605-8453
or visit our web site at http://www.EmersonAudioVideo.com
Before you use this unit , you need to complete connections. Refer to
‘Connections’ on pages 17–19.
To record a program easily, refer to‘Easy DVR / DVD Recording’ on pages
32–33 after connections are completed.
BeforeYou Start
Precautions
WARNING: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLI-
ANCETO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within
CAUTION
an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user
to the presence of uninsulated,“dangerous voltage”
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
within the product’s enclosure that may be of suffi-
DO NOT OPEN
cient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock
to persons.
:
CAUTION
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle
is intended to alert the user to the presence of
important operating and maintenance (servicing)
instructions in the literature accompanying the appli-
ance.
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK,DO NOT
REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER SERVICEABLE
PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICINGTO QUALIFIED SER-
VICE PERSONNEL.
Laser Safety
This unit employs a laser. Only a qualified service person should remove the cover or attempt to service this device, due to possible eye injury.
CAUTION:
USE OF CONTROLS ORADJUSTMENTS OR PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHERTHANTHOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY
RESULT IN HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE.
CAUTION:
VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AND INTERLOCK DEFEATED. DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM.
LOCATION: INSIDE, NEARTHE DECK MECHANISM.
FCCWARNING-This equipment may generate or use radio frequency energy. Changes or modifications to this
equipment may cause harmful interference unless the modifications are expressly approved in the manual. The
user could lose the authority to operate this equipment if an unauthorized change or modification is made.
RADIO-TV INTERFERENCE
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruc-
tions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not
occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can
be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more
of the following measures:
1) Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
2) Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
3) Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
4) Consult the dealer or an experienced radio /TV technician for help.
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
CAUTION:TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TOWIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT.
ATTENTION:POUR ÉVITER LES CHOC ÉLECTRIQUES, INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS LARGE DE LA
FICHE DANS LA BORNE CORRESPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER JUSQU’AU FOND.
A NOTEABOUT RECYCLING
This product’s packaging materials are recyclable and can be reused. Please dispose of any materials in accordance with your local recycling regu-
lations.
Batteries should never be thrown away or incinerated but disposed of in accordance with your local regulations concerning chemical wastes.
Make your contribution to the environment!!!
• Used up batteries do not belong in the dust bin.
• You can dispose of them at a collection point for used up batteries or special waste.
Contact your council for details.
For Customer Use:
Read carefully the information located at the back of this unit and enter below the Serial No. Retain this information for future refer-
ence.
Model No. _____________________
Serial No. _____________________
2
BeforeYou Start
Precautions (Cont’d)
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS
1. Read Instructions - All the safety and operating instruc-
to proper grounding of the mast and supporting struc-
tions should be read before the appliance is operated.
ture, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna dis-
charge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of
antenna-discharge unit, connection to grounding elec-
trodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode.
(Fig.A)
2. Retain Instructions- The safety and operating instruc-
tions should be retained for future reference.
3. Heed Warnings - All warnings on the appliance and in
the operating instructions should be adhered to.
4. Follow Instructions - All operating and use instructions
should be followed.
5. Cleaning - Unplug this product from the wall outlet before
cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners.
Use a damp cloth for cleaning.
EXCEPTION: A product that is meant for uninterrupted
service and, that for some specific reason, such as the pos-
sibility of the loss of an authorization code for a CATV con-
verter, is not intended to be unplugged by the user for clean-
ing or any other purpose, may exclude the reference to
unplugging the appliance in the cleaning description other-
wise required in item 5.
FIGURE A
ANTENNA
LEAD
WIRE
EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING
AS PER NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE
GROUND
CLAMP
ANTENNA
DISCHARGE UNIT
(NEC SECTION 810-20)
ELECTRIC
SERVICE
EQUIPMENT
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
(NEC SECTION 810-21)
GROUND CLAMP
NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE
S2898A
POWER SERVICE GROUNDING
ELECTRODE SYSTEM
(NEC ART 250, PART H)
6. Attachments - Do not use attachments not recom-
mended by the product manufacturer as they may cause
hazards.
7. WaterandMoisture-Donotusethisproductnearwater, for
example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laun-
dry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool, and
the like.
14. Lightning - For added protection for this product during
a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and
unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the wall
outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This
will prevent damage to the product due to lightning and
power-line surges.
15. Power Lines - An outside antenna system should not be
located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other
electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into
such power lines or circuits. When installing an outside
antenna system, extreme care should be taken to keep
from touching such power lines or circuits as contact
with them might be fatal.
8. Accessories - Do not place this product on an unstable
cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may
fall, causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious
damage to the appliance. Use only with
a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table
recommended by the manufacturer,or
sold with the product. Any mounting of
the appliance should follow the manu-
facturer's instructions and should use a
mounting accessory recommended by
the manufacturer. An appliance and cart
combination should be moved with
care. Quick stops, excessive force, and
uneven surfaces may cause the appliance and cart combi-
nation to overturn.
9. Ventilation - Slots and openings in the cabinet are provid-
ed for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the
product and to protect it from overheating, and these
openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings
should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed,
sofa, rug, or other similar surface.This product should not
be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack
unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufactur-
er's instructions have been adhered to.
10. Power Sources - This product should be operated only
from the type of power source indicated on the marking
label. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to
your home, consult your appliance dealer or local pow-
er company. For products intended to operate from bat-
tery power, or other sources, refer to the operating
instructions.
11. Grounding or Polarization -This product is equipped with
a polarized alternating-current line plug (a plug having
one blade wider than the other).This plug will fit into the
power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you
are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try
reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, con-
tact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do
not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug.
16. Overloading - Do not overload wall outlets and extension
cords as this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock.
17. Object and Liquid Entry - Never push objects of any kind
into this product through any openings as they may touch
dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could
result in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any
kind on the product.
18. Servicing - Do not attempt to service this product your-
self as opening or removing covers may expose you to
dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing
to qualified service personnel.
19. Damage Requiring Service - Unplug this product from the
wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service per-
sonnel under the following conditions:
a. When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged.
b. If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the
product.
c. If the product has been exposed to rain or water.
d. If the product does not operate normally by following
the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls
that are covered by the operating instructions as an
improper adjustment of other controls may result in
damage and will often require extensive work by a qual-
ified technician to restore the product to its normal oper-
ation.
e. If the product has been dropped or damaged in any way.
f. When the product exhibits a distinct change in perfor-
mance this indicates a need for service.
20. Replacement Parts - When replacement parts are
required, be sure the service technician has used replace-
ment parts specified by the manufacturer or have the
same characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized
substitutions may result in fire, electric shock or other
hazards.
21. Safety Check - Upon completion of any service or repairs
to this product, ask the service technician to perform
safety checks to determine that the product is in proper
operating condition.
12. Power Cord Protection - Power supply cords should be
routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or
pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying
particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience recep-
tacles, and the point where they exit from the appliance.
13. Outdoor Antenna Grounding - If an outside antenna or
cable system is connected to the product, be sure the
antenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide
some protection against voltage surges and built-up sta-
tic charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical Code,
ANSI / NFPA No. 70, provides information with regard
22. Heat - This product should be situated away from heat
sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or oth-
er products (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
3
BeforeYou Start
Precautions (Cont’d)
Installation Location
For safety and optimum performance of this unit:
• Install the unit in a horizontal and stable position. Do not place anything directly on top of the unit. Do not
place the unit directly on top of theTV.
• Shield it from direct sunlight and keep it away from sources of intense heat. Avoid dusty or humid places.
Avoid places with insufficient ventilation for proper heat dissipation. Do not block the ventilation holes on the
sides of the unit. Avoid locations subject to strong vibration or strong magnetic fields.
Avoid the Hazards of Electrical Shock and Fire
• Do not handle the power cord with wet hands.
• Do not pull on the power cord when disconnecting it fromAC wall outlet. Grasp it by the plug.
• If, by accident, water is spilled on this unit, unplug the power cord immediately and take the unit to our
Authorized Service Center for servicing.
Moisture CondensationWarning
Moisture condensation may occur inside the unit when it is moved from a cold place to a warm place or after
heating a cold room or under conditions of high humidity. Do not use this unit at least for 2 hours until its
inside gets dry.
About Copyright
Unauthorized copying, broadcasting, public performance and lending of discs are prohibited.
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S.patents and other intellec-
tual property rights. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is
intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
Notice for progressive scan outputs
Consumers should note that not all high definition television sets are fully compatible with this product and may
cause artifacts to be displayed in the picture.In case of picture problems with 525p progressive scan outputs,it
is recommended that the user switch the connection to the‘standard definition’ output.If there are questions
regarding yourTV set compatibility with this model 525p DVD recorder,please contact our customer service
center.
4
BeforeYou Start
Precautions (Cont’d)
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
Dolby Digital Recording
“Dolby® Digital Recording enables consumers to record high-quality video with stereo sound on recordable DVD
discs. The technology, when utilized instead of PCM recording, also saves recordable disc space, allowing for high-
er video resolution or extended recording time on each DVD. DVDs created using Dolby Digital Recording will play
back on all DVD-Video players.”
Note:This is true when the players are compatible with actual recordable DVD discs.
Dolby Digital Stereo Creator
“Dolby® Digital Stereo Creator enables consumers to create stereo DVD-Videos with stunning Dolby Digital sound
tracks at home. The technology, when utilized instead of PCM recording, also saves recordable disc space, allow-
ing for higher video resolution or extended recording time on each DVD. DVDs mastered using Dolby Digital Stereo
Creator will play back on all DVD-Video players.”
5
BeforeYou Start
Table of Contents
Information on Dubbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
BeforeYou Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Laser Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Functional Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Front Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Guide to Display information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Guide to Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Other Overviews . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
OneTouch Dubbing from DVR to DVD . . . . . . . . . .48
OneTouch Dubbing from Videotape to DVD . . . .50
Dubbing from DVR / DVD to Videotape . . . . . . . . .52
Bi-Directional Dubbing between DVR and DVD . .54
Deleting a Program from the Dubbing List . . . . . . . . . . .57
Changing the Order of the Dubbing List . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Dubbing from Videotape to DVR / DVD . . . . . . . . .58
Settings for the External Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Dubbing from the External Devices . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Protecting a Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Finalizing a Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Finalize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Auto Finalize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Playback Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Basic Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Direct Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Playback from theTitle List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Playback from theTitle List Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Playback from the DVD Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Playback from the Disc Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Playing back MP3 /WMA Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Special Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Resume Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Fast forward / Fast reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Slow forward / Slow reverse Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Time Shift Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Simultaneous Playback and Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Pause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Step-by-Step Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Variable Replay /Variable Skip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Repeat Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Random Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Program Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Title / Chapter Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Using SKIP H / G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Using DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Track Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Using SKIP H / G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Using DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Time Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Series Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Selecting a Format ofAudio andVideo . . . . . . . . . .86
Switching Subtitles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Switching Audio Soundtrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Switching CameraAngles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Visual Noise Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Connection to aTV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Connection to a Cable Box or Satellite Box . . . . .18
Connection to anAudio System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Initial Setups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
FirstTimeYouTurn on the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
OSD Language Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Channel Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Getting ChannelsAutomatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Adding / Deleting Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Clock Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Auto Clock Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Manual Clock Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Setting Daylight SavingTime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
TVAudio Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
TVAspect Ratio Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Recording / Dubbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Information on Supported Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Easy DVR / DVD Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Formatting a Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Selecting the Recording FormatType . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Formatting a Pre-Recorded Disc (Disc Format) . . . . . . .35
Monitoring the Recording Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Creating Chapter MarksAutomatically . . . . . . . . .37
Basic Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
OneTouch Recording (OTR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Timer Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Editing theTimer Programming Information . . . . . . . . .42
Hints forTimer Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Recording & Playback Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Guide to the Programmed Recordings Screen . . . . . . . .44
Programming a Recording with
the Recording & Playback Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
To Change or Cancel the Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Playback and Edit with Programmed Recordings . . . . . .46
6
BeforeYou Start
Table of Contents (Cont’d)
Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89 Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Information on Disc Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Guide to theTitle List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
What are Original List and Playlist? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Available Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
DeletingTitles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Deleting SelectedTitles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Deleting allTitles in DVR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Protecting / Undo ProtectingTitles . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
EditingTitle Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Guide to EditTitle Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Deleting a Part of aTitle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Dividing aTitle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
CombiningTitles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
MovingTitles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Chapter Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Adding Chapter Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Deleting Chapter Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
AddingTitles to a Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
General Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Timer Recording / Recording & Navigator . . . . . . . . . .128
Playback / Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Dubbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Language Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
FrequentlyAsked Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Español . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
WARRANTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Back Cover
Other Setups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Tour of the Setup Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Playback Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
1.Parental Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
2.Disc Menu Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
3.Audio Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
4.Subtitle Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
5.Audio Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
6.Variable Replay / Skip Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
7.Angle Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
8.Progressive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Display Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
1.FL Dimmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
2.Screen Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Reset to Factory Default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
VCR functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Guide to Display Information (VCR) . . . . . . . . . . .121
Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Basic Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
OneTouch Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Index Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Time Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Other Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
7
BeforeYou Start
Features
The following features are available with this unit.
Recording
DVR
This unit allows you to record on the DVR, a DVD-RW disc
(rewritable) and a DVD-R disc (one-time write) as well as a
videotape. You can choose any one for your convenience.
80GB Hard Disc (DVR) [ Pages 29~31]
This unit is equipped with a DVR with 80 GB hard disc
which allows you to record up to 170 hours (with SEP
mode). The DVR operates just like a VR mode DVD-RW
disc. Most of the functions which are available with a VR
mode DVD-RW disc can be performed on the DVR, too.
DVR / DVD /VCR
OneTouch Recording (OTR)
[
Page 39 (DVR / DVD) or
Page 123 (VCR)]
This feature allows you to start the recording right away
with just one-touch. And each press of REC / OTR
increases the recording time by 30 minutes.
Recording and Playback Navigation
[
Pages 44~46]
You can easily program recording or call and replay a title
which is recorded in the past on the calendar.
DVR / DVD
DVD
Timer programming up to 32 programs
[
Page 40~41]
Automatic Finalize (Video mode only) [ Page 64]
You can set the disc to be finalized automatically at your
desirable timing.
You can program the unit to record up to 32 programs
within a one-month period. Daily or weekly repeating
programs can also be programmed.
Automatic DVD Menu Making (Video mode only)
Recording Monitor [ Page 36]
[
Page 65]
You can check how the actual recording picture and the
sound will be in the selected Rec Mode before attempting
to record.
DVD Menus are made automatically when aVideo mode
disc is finalized.
Relay Recording [ Page 41]
Automatic Chapter Marker [ Page 37]
Each recorded title is automatically marked with chapter
marks.
DuringTimer Recording to a DVD,if the disc runs out of
the space,or if there is no recordable disc in the unit,it
automatically changes the recording media to the DVR.
Automatic Playlist Making (VR mode discs and
DVR only)
VCR
Left Channel Stereo Recording [ Page 127]
Material that has been recorded to the left channel only
can be automatically copied to the left and right channels
when dubbing.
[
Page 89]
Playlists are automatically copied from the Original List,
so that you can edit titles.
Dubbing
With this unit, you can enjoy bi-directional dubbing with
DVR, DVD or VCR.
DVR / DVD
Maximum of x 20 DVR toVR mode DVD-RW disc
dubbing speed (High Speed Dubbing)
[
Pages 54~56]
Up to 20 times high speed dubbing from DVR to VR
mode DVD-RW disc is possible if you use the compatible
disc.
Just Dubbing [ Page 54]
When dubbing from DVR to DVD,if you set the Rec Mode
to“Auto”,this unit will automatically select the most
suitable Rec Mode for the dubbing.
8
BeforeYou Start
Features (Cont’d)
Playback
Symbols Used in this Manual
The available functions depend on the type of disc or the
Recording Format. To specify disc type or Recording Format
for each function, we put the following symbols at the
beginning of each function description.
DVR / DVD /VCR
Simultaneous Playback and Recording [ Page 75]
You can play back a title while recording.
DVR / DVD
Symbol
Description
Theater-quality Sound at Home [ Page 19]
When connecting the unit to an amplifier or a decoder
that is compatible with Dolby Digital, you can experience
a theater-quality sound environment.
Available to DVR (internal HDD)
Available toVR mode DVD-RW discs
DVR
VR
DVD-RW
Video
Variable Skip [ Page 76]
You can skip a certain time, which is specified in the
Setup Menu in advance, with one-touch while playback.
Available toVideo mode DVD-RW discs
DVD-RW
Available to DVD-R discs
DVD-R
DVD-V
CCDD
Variable Replay [ Page 76]
You can skip back a certain time, which is specified in the
Setup Menu in advance, with one-touch while playback.
Available to DVD-Video discs
Available to Audio CDs
Progressive Scan System [ Page 17]
Unlike the standard definition output system (interlace
scanning),the progressive scan system provides less flick-
ering and higher resolution images than the traditional
scanning system does.
Available to CD-RW / R discs with
MP3 files
MP3
Available to CD-RW / R discs with
WMA files
WMA
Available toVHS tapes
DVR
Use only
this unit.
tapes marked with
VCR
Time Shift Playback [ Page 75]
You can play back from the top of the recording title while
recording without waiting for the recording to end.
Series Search [ Page 84]
You can search for the group of titles made with the same
PeriodicalTimer Recordings.
Windows Media and theWindows logo are
trademarks or registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States
and/or other countries.
This unit is not compatible with Multiple Bit
Rate (MBR: a file that contains the same
content encoded at several different
bit rates).
Editing
DVR / DVD
DeletingTitles [ Pages 90~91]
You can delete titles you no longer need.
“WMA” (Windows MediaAudio) is a new audio devel-
oped by Microsoft in the United States ofAmerica.
®
Making Playlists [ Pages 108~109]
While the Original List remains as it is, you can edit titles
in the Playlist.
Putting Names onTitles
Setting / Clearing Chapter Marks
Dividing / CombiningTitles
Deleting Parts ofTitles
MovingTitles
ProtectingTitles [ Page 93]
You can prevent accidental editing or title erasing.
9
BeforeYou Start
Functional Overview
The unit can also be turned on by
pressing these buttons.
*
Front Panel
2
3
4
5
6*
7
8
OPEN
/
CLOSE
POWER
STOP/EJECT REW
F.FWD
VCR
PLAY
REC/OTR
CHANNEL
DUBBING
VCR
DVR
DVD
STOP
PLAY DVR REC/OTR DVD
VCR
DVD
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
DVR
DVD
DVR/DVD
1
25 23
26 24 22
21
20
19 17
18
15* 13
14*
12
11 10
9
16
1 POWER:Press to turn the unit on / off.
15 STOP C * (DVR / DVD):
Press to stop playback,recording or dubbing.
2 POWER Light:Lights up when the power is on.
16 Device Select Buttons / Indicators:
3 REC/OTR Light (VCR):Lights up duringVCR
VCR :Press to activate theVCR. Lights up whenVCR
recording.
is selected.
4 Cassette compartment:Place a videotape here.
DVR:Press to activate the DVR. Lights up when DVR
5 Dubbing Light:Lights up during dubbing.
6 OPEN / CLOSE A * (DVD) :Press to open / close
is selected.
DVD :Press to activate the DVD. Lights up when DVD
the disc tray.
is selected.
7 REC/OTR Light (DVR/DVD):Lights up during
17 DUBBING DVR➞DVD:Press to start OneTouch
DVR/DVD recording.
Dubbing from DVR to DVD.
8 Disc tray:Place a disc here.
18 DUBBINGVCR➞DVD:Press to start OneTouch
9 AUDIO IN (LINE2):Connect the audio output of an
external device here using the supplied audio (L / R)
cable.
Dubbing fromVCR to DVD.
19 CHANNEL K / L:Press to change the channel.
20 Front Panel Display:Shows information and mes-
10 VIDEO IN (LINE2):Connect the video output of an
sages.
external device here using the supplied video cable.
21 Remote control sensor:Receives signals from the
11 S-VIDEO IN (LINE2):Connect the S-Video output
of an external device here using a commercially avail-
able S-Video cable.
remote control.
22 REC / OTR I (VCR):Press once to start a basic
recording. Press repeatedly to start an OTR (One
Touch Recording). Each press increases the recording
time by 30 minutes up to 8 hours.
12 RESET:Press with a sharp pointed object to restart
the unit when it freezes. Also refer to the‘Note’ below.
13 REC / OTR I (DVR / DVD):Press once to start a
basic recording. Press repeatedly to start an OTR (One
Touch Recording). Each press increases the recording
time by 30 minutes up to 8 hours.
23 PLAY B (VCR):Press to start playback.
24 F.FWD D (VCR):Press to fast forward or fast
search.
25 REW E (VCR):Press to rewind or rewind search.
14 PLAY B* (DVR / DVD):
26 STOP / EJECT
C
A (VCR):Press to eject the
Press to start playback or resume playback.
videotape. Press to stop recording or playback.
Note
After pressing RESET,
• The settings for the items listed below will be lost;
-Clock Setting
-Timer Program Setting
-Resume point
• The settings for the item listed below will not be
lost, but need to be set again.
-Channel Setting
• All other settings will remain memorized.
10
BeforeYou Start
Functional Overview (Cont’d)
Rear Panel
2
3
4
5
6
DVR/DVD
DVR/DVD/VCR
AUDIO IN AUDIO OUT ANTENNA
IN
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
DVR/DVD
Y
L
L
S-VIDEO
DIGITAL
AUDIO
AUDIO OUT
OUT
DVR/DVD/VCR
L
PB/CB
PR/CR
R
R
COAXIAL
IN
VIDEO IN VIDEO OUT
R
OUT
OUT
DVR/DVD
1
12 11
10
9
8
7
1 AC Power Cord:Connect to a standardAC outlet to
8 VIDEO OUT:Connect the video input of aTV moni-
tor, AV receiver, or other equipment here using the
supplied video cable.
supply power to this unit.
2 S-VIDEO IN (LINE 1):Connect the S-Video output
of an external equipment here using a commercially
available an S-Video cable.
9 VIDEO IN (LINE 1):Connect the video output of an
external device here using the supplied video cable.
3 COMPONENTVIDEO OUT (DVR / DVD):
Connect the component video input of aTV monitor,
AV receiver, or other equipment here using a commer-
cially available component video cable.
10 S-VIDEO OUT (DVR / DVD):Connect the S-Video
input of aTV monitor, AV receiver, or other equipment
here using a commercially available S-Video cable.
11 AUDIO OUT (DVR / DVD):Connect the audio
input of aTV monitor, AV receiver, or other equipment
here using the supplied audio (L / R) cable.
4 AUDIO IN (LINE 1):Connect an external equip-
ment here using a supplied audio cable.
5 AUDIO OUT:Connect the audio input of aTV moni-
tor, AV receiver, or other equipment here using the
supplied audio (L / R) cable.
12 COAXIAL DIGITALAUDIO OUT (DVR / DVD):
Connect anAV receiver, Dolby Digital decoder or oth-
er equipment with a coaxial digital input jack with a dig-
ital coaxial cable.
6 TVANTENNA IN:Use to connect an antenna.
7 TVANTENNA OUT:Use to connect an antenna
cable to pass the signal from theTVANTENNA IN to
yourTV monitor.
Note: Do not touch the inner pins of the jacks on the rear
panel. Electrostatic discharge may cause permanent
damage to the unit.
11
BeforeYou Start
Functional Overview (Cont’d)
Remote Control
1 POWER:Turns the unit on / off.
2 Number Buttons:
15
Press to select channel numbers.
Press to select a title / chapter / track on display.
Press to enter setting values.
16
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
POWER
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
17*
1
Press to enter the index number / desired time to
search inVCR mode.
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
CHANNEL
18
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
3 PROGRAM RECORDINGS:Press to call up the
Recording & Playback Navigation Screen.
2
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
4 SETUP:Press to display the Setup Menu. The unit
switches to the DVR / DVD mode when this button is
pressed.
SPACE
0
5 MENU / LIST (DVR / DVD):
Displays the Disc Menu.
PROGRAM
SETUP
AUDIO
CLEAR
RECORDINGS
19
3
4
Switch the Original List and the Playlist.
20
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
6 Cursor
/
/
/
:Selects items or settings.
21
5
7 DISPLAY:Displays the on-screen menu.
22
8 SKIP j / i (DVR / DVD):
ENTER
6
During playback, press to skip to the previous / next
chapter or track. Or when playback is paused, press to
play back in forward / reverse step by step.
DISPLAY
RETURN
23
7
8
VARIABLE VARIABLE
REPLAY
SKIP
SKIP
9 REV E:
24
25
26
27*
(DVR / DVD) During playback, press to play back in
fast reverse. Or when playback is paused, press to play
back in slow reverse.
REV
PLAY
FWD
9
10*
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
DVD
(VCR) Press to rewind the videotape or to view the
picture rapidly in reverse during the playback mode.
28
29
11
VCR
DVR
REC MONITOR
REC MODE
30
31
32
33
34
12
13
14
10 PLAY B * :Press to start or resume playback.
If you press this button when the power is off,the unit will
be turned on and the playback will start automatically.
If the resume point has been set,the playback will start
from the resume point.
REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
35
11 SLOW
(VCR):During playback, press to view the
videotape in slow motion.
12 REC MONITOR (DVR / DVD):Press to check the
picture and the audio qualities for recording.
13 REC MODE:Press to select the Rec Mode.
14 DUBBING MENU:Press to display the Dubbing
Menu. The unit switches to the DVR / DVD mode
when this button is pressed.
15 TIMER PROG.:Press to display theTimer Program
List. The unit switches to the DVR / DVD mode when
this button is pressed.
12
BeforeYou Start
Functional Overview (Cont’d)
16 INPUT SELECT:Press to select an input device.
28 PAUSE F:Press to pause playback or recording.
17 OPEN / CLOSE EJECT A (DVD /VCR)*:Press to
open / close the disc tray or eject a videotape.
Device Select Buttons:
18 CHANNEL
/
:
29 VCR:Press to activate the remote control inVCR
mode.(See page 16.)
Press to activate theVCR.
30 DVR:Press to activate the remote control in DVR
mode.(See page 16.)
Press to activate the DVR.
31 DVD:Press to activate the remote control in
Press to change the channel up / down.
(VCR) Press to adjust the tracking during playback or
in slow motion of the videotape. Also while playback is
in still mode, you can adjust the picture blurred verti-
cally.
19 CLEAR:
(DVR / DVD) Press to clear the information once
entered, etc.
DVD mode.(See page 16.)
Press to activate the DVD.
(DVD) Press to erase the track number entered in the
program playlist for a CD.
(VCR) Press to reset the tape counter.
32 REC / OTR (VCR):
Press once to start a basicVCR recording. Press
repeatedly to start a OneTouch Recording inVCR
mode.
20 AUDIO:During playback, press to change theAUDIO
Setting.
33 REC / OTR (DVR):
21 TOP MENU (DVR / DVD):Displays theTop Menu.
22 ENTER:Press to confirm or select menu items.
Press once to start a basic DVR recording. Press
repeatedly to start a OneTouch Recording in DVR
mode.
23 RETURN
played Menu Screen.
24 VARIABLE SKIP
:Press to return to the previously dis-
34 REC / OTR (DVD):
(DVR / DVD):
Press once to start a basic DVD recording. Press
repeatedly to start a OneTouch Recording in DVD
mode.
Skips by the set in advance.
25 VARIABLE REPLAY
(DVR / DVD):
Replays by the set in advance.
35 SEARCH MODE (VCR):Press to call up the index
orTime Search Menu.
26 FWD D:
(DVR / DVD) During playback, press to play back in
fast forward.Or when playback is paused, press to play
back in slow forward.
In DVR / DVD mode the unit can also be
turned on by pressing these buttons.
*
(VCR) Press to rapidly advance the videotape or view
the picture rapidly in forward during playback.
27 STOP C * :Press to stop playback, recording, or dub-
bing.
13
BeforeYou Start
Functional Overview (Cont’d)
Front Panel Display
4
2
3
TIME
P-SCAN
DB
1
VCR
DVR
PM
SHIFT
5
6
DVD
CD R W
7
1 PM : Appears in the afternoon with the Clock Display.
2 TIME SHIFT :
5
I DVR :Lights up during recording with DVR.
I DVD :Lights up during recording with DVD.
I VCR :Lights up during recording with VCR.
Appears during theTime Shift Playback.
6 Disc type and current status of the unit
3 Title /Track and Chapter mark
: Appears when an audio CD or a disc with
MP3 /WMA files is on the disc tray.
: Appears when indicating a title / track number.
: Appears when indicating a chapter number.
4 Current status of the unit
CD
: Appears when a DVD-R disc is loaded on the
disc tray.
R
: Appears whenTimer Recording is in Standby,
or is proceeding.
Disappears when all theTimer Recordings are
finished.
: Appears when a DVD-RW disc is loaded on
the disc tray.
RW
7 Displays the following
• Played-back time
P-SCAN :
• Current title / chapter / track number
• Recording time
• Clock
Appears when the picture output is progressive scan.
: Appears when a videotape is in the unit.
DB : Lights up during a dubbing process.
• Channel number
• VCR tape counter
• Remaining time for a OneTouch Recording
Display message
Appears when the unit is
turning on.
Appears when the unit is
turning off.
Appears when the disc tray is
opening.
Appears when a disc is loaded on
the disc tray.
Appears when the disc tray is
closing.
14
BeforeYou Start
Functional Overview (Cont’d)
Guide to Display Information
Guide to Setup Menu
This unit uses the following on-screen menu for most opera-
tions.It allows you to change the settings of the unit to match
the environment,and to customise the settings as you prefer.
“Easy Setting Menu” and “Advanced Menu” are avail-
able.
“Easy Setting Menu” consists of those frequently needed.
You can make all required settings using “Advanced Menu”.
The Display Menu gives you information on the play-
back status of the DVR or DVD.
Display Example :
Press DISPLAY once to show the information on the current
operation mode.
Press DISPLAY one more time to see more information,and to
call up the icons for the available features.
How to use Setup Menus :
DVD MODE
DVD Play
T
8 / 8
C
1 / 4 0:00:04/ 1:30:00
1
2
3
Press SETUP to display “Easy Setting Menu” or
AAA
“Advanced Menu”. Choose either menu using
/
,
then press ENTER.
• CD Menu is available only when a CD is loaded.
Example:Advanced Menu
4
Advanced Menu
DVD Menu
DVR Menu
DVD Recording Format
Press DISPLAY.
Initial Setup
Timer Program
CD
DVD MODE
T
8 / 8
C
1 / 4 0:00:04/ 1:30:00
?
NR
5
SEARCH
Easy Setting Menu
Using
/
,select a menu,then press ENTER.
Each section includes the information as listed below:
Advanced Menu
1
2
Device mode
• Current title number / total number of the titles
DVD Menu
DVR Menu
OSD Language
Clock Setting
Channel Setting
Playback
•
Current chapter number / total number of the chapters
• Elapsed playback time of the current title / total
time of the title
Initial Setup
Timer Program
CD
Record
3
• Playback status
• Name of the current title
Display
Easy Setting Menu
Reset to factory default
4
5
Playback status icon
Icons for the available features:
Using
/
,select an Item to set,then press ENTER.
: Search
Sub menu or option window will appear.
: Audio
: Subtitle
: Angle
Advanced Menu
DVD Menu
DVR Menu
OSD Language
Clock Setting
: Repeat
OSD Language
g
English
: Zoom
Initial Setup
Timer Progr
CD
Fraçais
Español
Display
: Noise Reduction
Easy Setting Menu
Reset to factory default
Note
• This is an example screen only for explanation.
Displayed items varies depending on the actual mode.
• The information will not appear under the following
conditions;
Using
press ENTER.
/
/
/
, make your desirable selection,then
- When there is no title recorded in the DVR/DVD.
- During recording (DVD only).
• Closed Caption will not be displayed while the
Display Information is shown on the screen.
Available menus vary among discs.
15
BeforeYou Start
Functional Overview (Cont’d)
Other Overviews
Installing batteries in the remote control
Install twoAA-size batteries (supplied), matching their
polarity to those indicated inside the battery compartment
of the remote control.
Switching DVR / DVD /VCR modes
Because this product is a combination of a DVR, DVD, and
VCR recorder, you must select first which component you
wish to operate.
DVR mode
Press DVR on the remote control.
(Verify that the DVR indicator is lit.)
1
3
2
DVD mode
Press DVD on the remote control.
(Verify that the DVD indicator is lit.)
Battery use and care
Incorrect use of batteries can result in hazards such as leak-
age and bursting. Please follow the instruction below:
• Do not mix new and old batteries together.
• Do not use different kinds of batteries together.
Although they may look similar, different batteries may
have different voltages.
VCR mode
Press VCR on the remote control.
(Verify that theVCR indicator is lit.)
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
Device Select Buttons / Indicators
POWER PROG. SELECT
• Make sure that the plus and minus ends of each battery
match the indications in the battery compartment.
• Remove batteries from equipment that is not going to
be used for a month or more.
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
CHANNEL
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
OPEN
/
CLOSE
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
POWER
STOP/EJECT REW
F.FWD
PLAY
REC/OTR
CHANNEL
DUBBING
VCR
DVR
DVD
STOP
PLAY DVR REC/OTR DVD
VCR
DVD
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
TIME
P-SCAN
DB
VCR
DVR
DVD
PM
SHIFT
SPACE
0
DVR
DVD
VCR
DVR/DVD
CD
R
W
PROGRAM
RECORDINGS SETUP
AUDIO
CLEAR
• When disposing of used batteries, please comply with
governmental regulations or public rules for environ-
mental protection that apply in your country or area.
• Do not recharge, short-circuit, heat, burn or disas-
semble batteries.
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
ENTER
DISPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE VARIABLE
SKIP
REPLAY
SKIP
DVD Button
DVR Button
REV
SLOW
PLAY
FWD
STOP
PAUSE
DVD
VCR
DVR
REC MONITOR
VCR
DVR DVD
Using a remote control
VCR Button
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
Keep in mind the following when using the remote control:
• Make sure that there is no obstacle between the remote
control and the remote sensor of the unit.
• Remote operation may become unreliable if strong sun-
light or fluorescent light shines on the remote sensor of
the unit.
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DVD Button / Indicator
DVR Button / Indicator
VCR Button / Indicator
• Remote control for different devices can interfere with
each other. Avoid using remote controls for other
equipment located close to the unit.
• Replace the batteries when you notice a fall-off of the
operating range of the remote control.
Note
• Pressing the device select button on the front panel
DOES NOT switch the device mode of the remote
control. You MUST select the correct device mode
on the remote control.
• The maximum operable ranges (approximate) from the
unit are as follows.
• If you press REC / OTR of each device, recording
starts in its device mode.
• When the buttons listed below are pressed, the unit
switches to the DVR / DVD mode.
- TIMER PROG.
- Straight line:
23 feet (7 m)
- Either side of center: 16 feet (5 m) within 30°
-Above:
- Below:
16 feet (5 m) within 15°
10 feet (3 m) within 30°
- SETUP
- DUBBING MENU
• When the button listed below is pressed, the unit
switches to the DVR mode.
16 feet (5 m)
(15°)
- PROGRAM RECORDINGS
OPEN
/
CLOSE
POWER
STOP/EJECT REW
F.FWD
PLAY
REC/OTR
CHANNEL
DUBBING
VCR
DVR
DVD
STOP
PLAY DVR REC/OTR DVD
VCR
DVD
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
TIME
P-SCAN
DB
VCR
DVR
DVD
PM
SHIFT
DVR
DVD
VCR
DVR/DVD
CD
R
W
23 feet (7 m)
16 feet (5 m)
(30°)
16 feet (5 m)
(30°)
10 feet (3 m)
(30°)
16
Connections
Connection to aTV
Antenna
Antenna
(Back of TV)
Cable
TV signal
Cable
TV signal
(Back ofTV)
4
3
Plug in the AC power
cord of this unit.
or
or
Connect
RF cable
(supplied)
1
DVR/DVD
COMPONENT
DVR/DVD/VCR
AUDIO IN AUDIO OUT ANTENNA
IN
VIDEO OUT
Disconnect
/DVD
AUDIO
OUT
S-VIDEO
Y
L
L
T
Note
DVR/DVD/VCR
L
PB/CB
R
R
IN
VIDEO IN VIDEO OUT
• You can connect to TV
with A/V cables or RF
cable.
2
R
PR/CR
OUT
OUT
Connect
DVR/DVD
(Back of this unit)
Choose one of the following connections,depending on the capabilities of the equipment you possess.
(V = Available,
-
= Not Available)
Basic Audio Connection
Video Connections
Picture Quality
Basic
V
Good
V
Best
V
TV
OR
OR
DVR/DVD
VCR
V (required)
-
-
AUDIO IN
(Compatible with
the Progressive
COMPONENT
VIDEO IN
VIDEO IN
S-VIDEO IN
Scan mode)
TV
Y
This unit
PB/CB
PR/CR
OR
Video cable
(supplied)
S-Video cable
(commercially
available)
Component
Audio cable
(supplied)
video cable
(commercially
available)
DVR/DVD/VCR
AUDIO OUT
DVR/DVD
AUDIO
OUT
L
DVR/DVD
DVR/DVD/VCR
AUDIO IN AUDIO OUT A
I
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
DVR/DVD
S-VIDEO
Y
L
L
L
DIGITAL
AUDIO
AUDIO OUT
OUT
R
DVR/DVD/VCR
L
PB/CB
PR/CR
R
R
S-VIDEO
DVR/DVD
DVR/DVD/VCR
AUDIO OUT
COAXIAL
IN
VIDEO IN VIDEO OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
VIDEO OUT
R
OUT
R
Y
L
This unit
DVR/DVD
DVR/DVD/VCR
IN
R
PB/CB
VIDEO OUT
PR/CR
OUT
•
These jacks are useful only in
DVR / DVD mode.
DVR/DVD
AUDIO OUT
VIDEO OUT
S-VIDEO OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
Note
• Connect this unit directly to the TV.
• The DVR/DVD andVCR is sending each video signals simultaneously.
• You will not be able to hear all of the sound being output by this unit if you use the video/audio cables (supplied) to
a monaural TV that has only one audio input jack.
• Be sure that the colours of the jacks and plugs match up when connecting the cable.
• The S-VIDEO OUT and COMPONENTVIDEO OUT jacks are only useful for DVR/DVD playback.
• If your TV is compatible with the Progressive Scan System, and you want to utilize its feature, use COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT connection. If you use any other connection such as VIDEO OUT or S-VIDEO OUT, the picture will
not be output in the Progressive Scan mode but in the standard output mode (Interlace).
If yourTV is compatible with 525 or 625 progressive scanning and you want to enjoy the high quality picture;
Use COMPONENTVIDEO OUT connection, set the “Progressive” to “On” in the Setup Menu (see page 117), and
make sure “P.SCAN” indication is on the Front Panel Display.
yourTV is not compatible with Progressive Scan
If
;
If your TV is not compatible with progressive scanning, set “Progressive” to “Off” in the Setup Menu, and make
sure no “P.SCAN” indication is on the Front Panel Display.
17
Connections
Connection to aTV (Cont’d)
After you have completed connections
Turn yourTV to the appropriate external input channel (usually near channel 0) in order to view the pictures output
from this unit on theTV. To find the external input channel press the channel button on yourTV’s remote repeatedly until
the DVD recorder’s picture appears.External input channels may vary depending on the connection you made.Check
yourTV owner’s manual for details.
Input Mode Names for Common TV Brands (Example)
Admiral
Curtis Mathis
GE
AUX
Panasonic
TV/VIDEO
LINE1, LINE2, 00, 90, 91, 92, 93
RCA
INPUT, TV / VCR, 00, 90, 91, 92, 93
INPUT, TV / VCR, 00, 90, 91, 92, 93 Samsung
TV/VIDEO
Hitachi
INPUT, AUX
Sanyo
Sharp
Sony
VIDEO
JVC
VIDEO, VIDEO1, VIDEO2, VIDEO3
00
Kenwood
LXI-Series
Magnavox
AUX
VIDEO1, VIDEO2, VIDEO3
00
Toshiba
Zenith
TV / GAME
00
AUX CHANNEL
Connection to a Cable Box or Satellite Box
(Back of this unit)
(Cable box or
D/VCR
OUT ANTENNA
IN
Satellite box)
L
CableTV signal
R
IN
OUT
OT
E
RF cable
(supplied)
OUT
(Back of TV)
This connection allows you to view or record a scrambled channel. With this connection,channels cannot be changed on
this unit. You can view or record ONLY the channels you have selected on the cable box or the satellite box.
• Read the instruction manual of the cable box or the satellite box also.
Note to the CableTV System Installer:
This reminder is provided to call the Cable TV system installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the
National Electrical Code, which provides guidelines for proper grounding–in particular, specifying that the
cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable
entry as possible.
18
Connections
Connection to anAudio System
• When you change the connections,all devices should be turned off.
• Refer to the operation manual accompanying external devices for more information.
Method 1
Method 2
Stereo system
Dolby Digital decoder,
MD deck or DAT deck
Analog audio
input jacks
AUDIO
COAXIAL
Digital audio
input jack
Digital Coaxial
cable
(commercially
available)
Audio cable
(supplied)
DVR/DVD
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
This unit
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
DVR/DVD/VCR
AUDIO OUT
L
AUDIO OUT
R
Initial Setup >Playback >Audio Out >
Setting
Connection
PCM
-
Dolby Digital
Stream
or
If output is Dolby Digital encod-
ed audio,connect to a Dolby
Digital decoder.
DVR/DVD
AUDIO
OUT
L
Unless connected to a Dolby
Digital decoder.
-
-
PCM
PCM
R
Connecting to an MD deck or
DAT deck.
*To complete these settings.(See pages 115–116.)
Note
• By connecting this unit to a Multi-channel Dolby
Digital decoder, you can enjoy high-quality Dolby
Digital 5.1 channel surround sound as heard in the
movie theaters.
• The audio source on a disc in a Dolby Digital 5.1
channel surround format cannot be recorded as
digital sound by an MD or DAT deck.
• Playing back a DVD using incorrect settings may
generate noise distortion and may also damage the
speakers.
19
Initial Setups
FirstTimeYouTurn on the Unit
Right after the purchase of the unit,do the Initialize
Setting by taking the following procedures.
This menu may not appear if you have already turned
on the unit.
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
POWER
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
After making all the necessary connections, turn on
the TV. Select the appropriate external input
channel. (See page 18.)
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
1
CHANNEL
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
Press POWER. The Display shown below will
appear.
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
2
SPACE
0
These menus may not appear if you have already
turned on the unit. If you have already turned on
the unit before, refer to ‘OSD Language Setting’ on
page 21 to select a language for the on-screen
displays and the menus,‘Channel Setting’ on page 22
to setup the channels, and ‘Clock Setting’ on page 24
to set the clock.
PROGRAM
SETUP
AUDIO
CLEAR
RECORDINGS
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
ENTER
OSD Lannguage
English
DISPLAY
RETURN
Français
Español
VARIABLE VARIABLE
REPLAY
SKIP
SKIP
If you press PLAY B at this point, “English” will
be selected automatically and the steps 3 and 4 can
be skipped.
REV
PLAY
FWD
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
DVD
Press
/
to select “English”,“Français
VCR
DVR
REC MONITOR
3
(French)” or“Español (Spanish)”. Then,press
ENTER. The following screen will automatically
appear and theAuto Channel Preset will start.
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
If you like to skip this step, press RETURN
as
soon as the search begins.
Auto Preset
AfterAuto Channel Preset is finished,theAuto Clock
function will be activated automatically and the cor-
rect time will be set.
4
20
Initial Setups
OSD Language Setting
If you have already set the OSD Language when you first turned
on the unit,you can skip this section.
Press SETUP.
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
1
POWER
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
“Easy Setting Menu” or “Advanced Menu” will appear.
Advanced Menu
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
DVD Menu
DVRMenu
InitialSetup
Timer Program
DVD Disc Format
CHANNEL
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
DVD Recording Format
Finalize
Disc Protect
Delete Playlist
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
SPACE
0
Easy Setting Menu
PROGRAM
SETUP
AUDIO
CLEAR
RECORDINGS
Using
/
,select “Initial Setup”. Press ENTER.
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
2
3
Advanced Menu
DVD Menu
OSD Language
Clock Setting
Channel Setting
Playback
ENTER
DVR Menu
DISPLAY
RETURN
Initial Setup
Timer Program
Record
VARIABLE VARIABLE
REPLAY
SKIP
SKIP
Display
Easy Setting Menu
Reset to factory default
REV
PLAY
FWD
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
DVD
Using
Press ENTER.
/
,select “OSD Language”.
VCR
DVR
REC MONITOR
OSD Language Menu will appear.
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
OSD Lannguage
English
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
Fraçais
Español
Using
/
,select a language. Press ENTER.
4
5
Your setting is now activated.
• The default setting is “English”.
Press SETUP to exit.
21
Initial Setups
Channel Setting
Getting ChannelsAutomatically
If you have already set the channels when you first turned on
the unit,you can skip this section.
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
POWER
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
After resetting the settings or whenever you move to a new
area,we recommend you to program available channels in
your area with the following procedures.
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
CHANNEL
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
Press POWER.
1
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
Turn on theTV. Select the appropriate external input
channel. (See page 18.)
2
SPACE
0
PROGRAM
SETUP
AUDIO
CLEAR
RECORDINGS
VIDEO/TV
TV's remote
control
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
*This button can
be labeled as
INPUT,AUX, etc.
ENTER
DISPLAY
RETURN
Press SETUP.
3
“Easy Setting Menu” or “Advanced Menu” will appear.
VARIABLE VARIABLE
REPLAY
SKIP
SKIP
Advanced Menu
DVD Menu
DVRMenu
InitialSetup
Timer Program
DVD Disc Format
REV
PLAY
FWD
DVD Recording Format
Finalize
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
DVD
Disc Protect
Delete Playlist
VCR
DVR
REC MONITOR
Easy Setting Menu
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
Using
Press ENTER.
/
,select “Initial Setup”.
4
Advanced Menu
DVD Menu
OSD Language
Clock Setting
Channel Setting
Playback
DVR Menu
Initial Setup
Timer Program
Record
Display
Easy Setting Menu
Reset to factory default
Using
Press ENTER.
/
,select “Channel Setting”.
5
Channel Setting Menu will appear.
Channel Setting
Auto Prreset
Manual Preset
TV Audio Select
22
Initial Setups
Channel Setting (Cont’d)
Using
/
,select “Auto Preset”. Press ENTER.
Using
Press ENTER.
/
,select “Channel Setting”.
6
3
The unit will start getting channels available in your area.
Channel Setting Menu will appear.
Channel Setting
Auto Prreset
Manual Preset
TV Audio Select
Using
Press ENTER.
/
,select “Manual Preset”.
Auto Preset
4
Option window will appear.
Wait for several minutes for channel scanning to finish.
After Auto Preset has stopped:
CH 1
Add
Delete
• Use CHANNEL
/
or the Number
Buttons to change the channel.
• When you use the Number Buttons, press 0
first for a single digit number.
• Use INPUT SELECT to select an external
input channel (“L1” or “L2”) of this unit.
Using
delete.
/
/
,select the channel number to add or
or CHANNEL to change the
5
6
•
Use
/
channels one by one, or use the Number Buttons
to select the channel directly
.
Adding / Deleting Channels
Using
Press ENTER.
/
,select “Add” or“Delete”.
The channels you no longer receive or seldom watch can be
deleted from the memory. You can also add channels manu-
ally into memory.
The channel number will be added or deleted from
the channel memory. Then, the next channel
number will appear so that you can continue adding
or deleting channels.
Press SETUP.
1
“Easy Setting Menu” or “Advanced Menu” will appear.
CH 1
Add
Advancced Menu
Delete
DVD Menu
DVRMenu
InitialSetup
Timer Program
DVD Disc Format
DVD Recording Format
Finalize
Press SETUP to exit.
Disc Protect
Delete Playlist
7
Easy Setting Menu
Using
/
,select “Initial Setup”
2
Note
Press ENTER.
• External Input Channels (“L1” or “L2”) cannot be
skipped.
• You cannot change the channel while the unit (DVR,
VCR or DVD) is in the recording, OTR or Timer
Recording mode.
• If the auto presetting is cancelled during presetting,
some of the channels not yet preset may not be
received.
Advancced Menu
DVD Menu
OSD Language
Clock Setting
Channel Setting
Playback
DVR Menu
Initial Setup
Timer Program
Record
Display
Easy Setting Menu
Reset to factory default
• The selection will depend on how you receive the TV
channels.
• To cancel the Auto Preset during scanning:
Press RETURN
.
23
Initial Setups
Clock Setting
If you have already set the Clock when you first turned on the
unit,you can skip this section.
Set the clock before you tryTimer Recording. If Public
Broadcasting Service (PBS) is available in your area,follow
theAuto Clock Setting below. If not,refer to‘Manual Clock
Setting’ on page 25.
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
POWER
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
Make sure the antenna / cableTV connections are correct.
• You cannot set the clock while the unit is in the recording,
OTR orTimer Recording mode.
CHANNEL
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
Auto Clock Setting
If this unit is connected to a Cable Box or Satellite Box,
select the local PBS station to set the clock automatically.
SPACE
0
PROGRAM
SETUP
AUDIO
CLEAR
RECORDINGS
Press SETUP.
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
1
“Easy Setting Menu” or “Advanced Menu” will appear.
Advanced Menu
ENTER
DVD Menu
DVRMenu
InitialSetup
Timer Program
DVD Disc Format
DISPLAY
RETURN
DVD Recording Format
Finalize
VARIABLE VARIABLE
Disc Protect
Delete Playlist
REPLAY
SKIP
SKIP
REV
PLAY
FWD
Easy Setting Menu
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
DVD
Using
/
,select “Initial Setup”. Press ENTER.
VCR
DVR
REC MONITOR
2
Advanced Menu
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DVD Menu
OSD Language
Clock Setting
Channel Setting
Playback
DVR Menu
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
Initial Setup
Timer Program
Record
Display
Easy Setting Menu
Reset to factory default
Using
Press ENTER.
/
,select “Clock Setting”.
3
4
Clock Setting Menu will appear.
Clock Setting
Clock Setting
Auto Cloock Setting
Daylight Saving Time
Using
Press ENTER.
/
,select “Auto Clock Setting”.
Option window will appear.
Auto Clock Setting
Off
Auto
Manual
24
Initial Setups
Clock Setting (Cont’d)
Manual Clock Setting
If you do not know the PBS channel number
in your area :
5
Press SETUP.
1
Using ,select “Auto”. Press ENTER.
/
“Easy Setting Menu” or “Advanced Menu” will appear.
Your setting is now activated.
Advanced Menu
DVD Menu
DVRMenu
InitialSetup
Timer Program
DVD Disc Format
DVD Recording Format
If you know the PBS channel number
in your area :
Finalize
Disc Protect
Delete Playlist
Using
/
, select “Manual”. Press ENTER.
Input window will appear.
Easy Setting Menu
Set Channnel No.
CH 1
Using
/
,select “Initial Setup”. Press ENTER.
2
Advanced Menu
Using the Number Buttons or
PBS channel number. Press ENTER.
Your setting is now activated.
/
, enter the
DVD Menu
OSD Language
Clock Setting
Channel Setting
Playback
DVR Menu
Initial Setup
Timer Program
Record
If you want to set the clock manually and to
cancel the Auto Clock Setting :
Display
Easy Setting Menu
Reset to factory default
Using
/
, select “Off”. Press ENTER.
The Auto Clock Setting will be canceled.
Using
Press ENTER.
/
,select “Clock Setting”.
3
4
• The default setting is “Auto”.
Clock Setting Menu will appear.
Press SETUP to exit.
6
7
Clock Setting
Clock Setting
Press POWER to turn off the unit.
Auto Cloock Setting
Daylight Saving Time
This unit will search for the clock time only when
the power is off. Leave it off for several minutes to
give the unit a time to set the clock.
Using
Press ENTER.
/
,select “Clock Setting”.
Clock Setting Window will appear.
Note
• The clock may set itself automatically after you
connect the antenna / cable signal to this unit and
plug in the power cord. In this case, the current time
will appear on the Front Panel Display.
Clock Setting
MAR / 15
/
2006 (Wed) 11
:
26 AM
• If the current time is not displayed or the displayed
clock time is not correct, set the clock manually.
Using
using
ence.
/
/
,move to the item your want to set,and
,change the setting to suite your prefer-
5
6
When all the information is entered,press ENTER.
Your setting is now activated.
Although seconds are not displayed, they will be
counted from zero.
Press SETUP to exit.
7
Note
• Your clock setting will be lost if either there is a
power failure or this unit has been unplugged for
more than 30 seconds.
25
Initial Setups
Clock Setting (Cont’d)
Setting Daylight SavingTime
When Daylight SavingTime is on,the clock will automatically
move forward one hour at 2:00 a.m on the first Sunday in
April and move back one hour at 2:00 a.m on the last
Sunday in October.
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
POWER
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
Press SETUP.
1
CHANNEL
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
“Easy Setting Menu” or “Advanced Menu” will appear.
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
Advanced Menu
DVD Menu
DVRMenu
InitialSetup
Timer Program
DVD Disc Format
SPACE
0
DVD Recording Format
Finalize
PROGRAM
SETUP
AUDIO
CLEAR
RECORDINGS
Disc Protect
Delete Playlist
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
Easy Setting Menu
ENTER
Using
/
,select “Initial Setup”. Press ENTER.
2
DISPLAY
RETURN
Advanced Menu
VARIABLE VARIABLE
DVD Menu
OSD Language
Clock Setting
Channel Setting
Playback
REPLAY
SKIP
SKIP
DVR Menu
Initial Setup
Timer Program
REV
PLAY
FWD
Record
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
DVD
Display
Easy Setting Menu
Reset to factory default
VCR
DVR
REC MONITOR
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
Using
Press ENTER.
/
,select “Clock Setting”.
3
4
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
Clock Setting Menu will appear.
Clock Setting
Clock Setting
Auto Cloock Setting
Daylight Saving Time
Using
Press ENTER.
/
,select “Daylight SavingTime”.
Option window will appear.
Daylight Saving Time
On
Off
Using
/
,select “On” to activate the Daylight
5
6
SavingTime. Press ENTER.
If you do not want to use the Daylight Saving Time
feature select “Off”.
• The default setting is “On”.
Press SETUP to exit.
26
Initial Setups
TVAudio Setting
You can select an audio channel to output fromTV.
Press SETUP.
1
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
“Easy Setting Menu” or “Advanced Menu” will appear.
POWER
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
Advanced Menu
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
DVD Menu
DVRMenu
InitialSetup
Timer Program
DVD Disc Format
DVD Recording Format
CHANNEL
Finalize
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
Disc Protect
Delete Playlist
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
Easy Setting Menu
SPACE
0
PROGRAM
SETUP
AUDIO
CLEAR
RECORDINGS
Using
/
,select “Initial Setup”. Press ENTER.
2
Advanced Menu
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
DVD Menu
OSD Language
Clock Setting
Channel Setting
Playback
DVR Menu
Initial Setup
Timer Program
ENTER
DISPLAY
RETURN
Record
Display
Easy Setting Menu
Reset to factory default
Note
• This unit CANNOT record in both stereo and SAP
(Secondary Audio Program) at the same time.
Using
Press ENTER.
/
,select “Channel Setting”.
3
4
5
SAP (SecondaryAudio Program);
Channel Setting Menu will appear.
• SAP is the Secondary Audio Program which is usually
used as an alternate in bilingual broadcasting, such as
a broadcasting in Spanish.The SAP signal is delivered
using the sub-audio channel.While the main-audio
channel has 2 channels for L & R, the sub-audio
channel has only 1 channel.Therefore, the SAP will
always be broadcasted in monaural sound (outputting
the same sound from the left and the right speakers).
Channel Setting
Auto Prreset
Manual Preset
TV Audio Select
Using
Press ENTER.
/
,select “TVAudio Select”.
Option window will appear.
Notes onTV channel audio
TV Audio Select
Stereo
•
If you want to record a TV program available in second
audio or stereo on DVR, DVD-RW/R discs or videotape,
you have to select either “Stereo” or “SAP”
beforehand. Refer to the following table to check the
appropriate setting.
SAP
Using
Press ENTER.
/
,select “Stereo” or “SAP”.
Broadcast audio
Selected DVR/DVD/VCR
Stereo:
Outputs main-audio.
Main-audio Sub-audio audio
recording
channel
STEREO
STEREO
MONO
MONO
STEREO
STEREO
MONO
MONO
channel
SAP
NONE
SAP
NONE
SAP
NONE
SAP
SAP (Secondary Audio Program):
Outputs sub-audio.
STEREO
STEREO
MONO
MONO
SAP
STEREO
SAP
MONO
Refer to the item in ‘Glossary’ on page 134 for
more information.
Stereo
SAP
• The default setting is “Stereo”.
Press SETUP to exit.
6
NONE
• You can only play back the disc in second audio if a
TV program is available in second audio and you set
TV Audio Select to SAP.
27
Initial Setups
TVAspect Ratio Setting
You can select theTV aspect ratio to match the formats of
what you are playing back on the unit and yourTV screen
(4:3 standard or 16:9 widescreenTV).
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
POWER
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
Press SETUP.
1
“Easy Setting Menu” or “Advanced Menu” will appear.
If “Advanced Menu” is displayed,proceed to step 3.
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
Easy Setting Menu
CHANNEL
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
DVD Menu
DVRMenu
InitialSetup
Timer Program
DVD Disc Format
DVD Recording Format
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
Finalize
Disc Protect
Delete Playlist
SPACE
0
PROGRAM
SETUP
AUDIO
CLEAR
RECORDINGS
Advanced Menu
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
Using
Press ENTER.
/
,select “Advanced Menu”.
2
3
ENTER
Using ,select “Initial Setup”. Press ENTER.
/
DISPLAY
RETURN
Advanced Menu
DVD Menu
OSD Language
Clock Setting
Channel Setting
Playback
VARIABLE VARIABLE
REPLAY
SKIP
SKIP
DVR Menu
Initial Setup
Timer Program
REV
PLAY
FWD
Record
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
DVD
Display
Easy Setting Menu
Reset to factory default
VCR
DVR
REC MONITOR
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
Using
/
,select “Playback”. Press ENTER.
4
5
Playback Menu will appear.
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
Playback
TV Aspect
Parental Lock
Disc Meenu Language
Audio Laanguage
Subtitle Language
Audio Out
Variable Replay/Skip Speed
Angle Icon
Progressive
Using
/
,select “TVAspect”. Press ENTER.
Option window will appear.
TV Aspect
4:3 Letter Box
4:3 Pan && Scan
16:9 Wide
Note
• If you have a standard TV:
Using
/
,select a desired option. Press ENTER.
6
7
Select “4:3 Letter Box” for full-length picture with
black bars on the top and bottom of the screen.
Select “4:3 Pan & Scan” for a full-height picture
with both sides trimmed.
• If you have a widescreen TV:
Select “16:9 Wide”.
Your setting is now activated.
• The default setting is “4:3 Letter Box”.
Press SETUP to exit.
28
Recording / Dubbing
Information on Supported Media
Media types
: Most suitable.
You want to
RecordTV programs
: Can be used.
DVR
: Some functions are limited.
: Cannot be used.
VCR
DVD-R
DVD-RW VR
DVD-RW Video
Reuse by deleting unwanted contents
Edit recorded contents
*2
Edit/Record from connected equipment
Copy discs for distribution
*1
*1
Play on other DVR(HDD)/DVD/VCR equipment
*1
VR mode DVD-RW can only be played on DVD equipment that isVR compatible.
*2 Programs can be recorded from other equipment, but they cannot be edited.
Features
DVR
DVD-RW VR
DVD-RW Video
VCR
DVD-R
Recording
Rewritable
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Can create chapters at fixed intervals (auto.)
Can create chapters wherever you like (manual)
Can record 16:9 size pictures
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes *1
Can record copy-once programs
Editing
Can perform basic edit functions
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
No
Can perform advanced edit functions (Playlist edit)
*1
CPRM compatible disc only.
Note: For details of the above functions and implied restrictions, see the explanations inside the manual.
Information
Recordable disc
This unit can record on DVD-RW discs and DVD-R discs.
DVD-R discs allow you to record programs only once,and
the recorded contents cannot be erased.
Discs which can be used with this recorder:
• DVD-R disc:up to 16x (4x or 8x disc is recom-
mended)
DVD-RW discs allow you to record programs repeatedly,
and the recorded contents can be erased.
There are 2 recording format,VR mode andVideo mode,for
DVD-RW discs while there is only one recording format,
Video mode,for DVD-R discs.
•
DVD-RW disc:2x and 4x (2x disc is recommended)
Discs tested and proven to be compatible with this
recorder:
MAXELL DVD-R disc 4x TDK DVD-RW disc 2x
JVC DVD-RW disc 4x
VERBATIM DVD-R disc 8x
VR mode is the basic recording format for the DVD-RW
disc.It is suited for editing the recorded contents,and playable
only on the DVD-RW compatible unit.VR mode disc has both
Original List and Playlist,and creates the Playlist automatically
when programs (titles) are recorded.
Disc type Disc format Functions
Video mode
Video
Playback, limited
recording, limited editing
DVD-RW
Video mode is the same recording format as those DVD-
Video discs purchased locally.
VR mode
VR
Playback, recording, Original
List / Playlist editing
DVD-RW
DVD-R
DVD-RW
Video mode disc can be played back on most DVD players.
Although the available editing menus are limited compare to
theVR mode disc,you still can add or delete the recordings,
or edit the contents before finalizing.Video mode disc has
only Original List,and creates the DVD Menu automatically
when it is finalized.
Video mode
Playback, limited
recording, limited editing
DVD-R
DVD players with
recorded inVR mode.
are capable of playing DVD-RW disc
Logo
Attributes
8 cm / 12 cm, single-sided, single layer disc
Approx. max. recording time (SEP mode):
600 minutes (4.7 GB) (for 12 cm)
DVD-RW
DVD-R
180 minutes (1.4 GB) (for 8 cm)
29
Recording / Dubbing
Information on Supported Media (Cont’d)
Rec Mode
Note
You can select a Rec Mode among 6 options,and the
recording time and the picture/audio quality of recorded
material depends on the Rec Mode you select.
• This recorder cannot record on CD-RW or CD-R
discs.
• DVD-RW/R discs and CD-RW/R discs recorded on a
personal computer or a DVD or CD recorder may
not be played back if the disc is damaged or dirty or
if there is dirt of condensation on the player’s lens.
• If you record on a disc using a personal computer,
there are cases in which it may not be played back
because of the settings of the application software
used to create the disc, even if it is recorded in a
compatible format. (Check with the software
publisher for more detailed information.)
• Discs recorded inVideo mode on this unit cannot
record additionally using other DVD recorders.
• Since the recording is made by the variable bit rate
(VBR) method, the actual remaining time for
recording may be a little bit shorter than the
remaining time displayed on the OSD, depending on
the picture you are recording.
Rec
Recording
time
Video / Sound
Quality
Disc Size
Mode
(good)
XP
SP
18 min
36 min
72 min
108 min
144 min
180 min
8 cm Disc
LP
EP
SLP
SEP
(poor)
(good)
XP
SP
60 min
120 min
240 min
360 min
480 min
600 min
LP
12 cm Disc
EP
SLP
SEP
(poor)
(good)
XP
SP
17
34
68
H
H
H
• Playlist will be created automatically when recording
toVR mode DVD-RW disc and DVR.
LP
DVR
EP
102 H
136 H
170 H
About DVD+RW/R discs
• You cannot use DVD+RW/R disc for recording.
• Only the finalizedVideo mode DVD+RW/R discs can
be played back on this unit.
• If you insert a blank DVD+RW/R disc, an error
message will appear.
SLP
SEP
(poor)
To select the Rec Mode you prefer,press REC MODE.
The information of the selected media (DVR or DVD) will
be displayed.
• The performance of DVD+RW/R discs on this unit is
not guaranteed.
Restrictions on recording
You cannot record copy protected discs or tapes using this
unit.Copy protected material includes DVD-Video and
some satellite broadcasts.
DVR
XP 17:32
CH7
Indicates the remaining time of the disc when
recorded with the selected Rec Mode.
If copy protected material is encountered during a record-
ing,recording will be paused or stop automatically and an
error message will be displayed on-screen.
Copy-once programs can only be recorded on the DVR or
on a CPRM compatibleVR mode DVD-RW disc (see below).
Press REC MODE repeatedly to change the Rec Mode.
The speed will be changed each time you press it with the
following order:
Maximum Recordable numbers of title /
chapters
XP
SP
LP
DVR:
300 titles per each Playlist and Original List
999 chapters per title
SEP
SLP
EP
The information will disappear in a few seconds,or press
VR mode DVD: 99 titles per each Playlist and Original List
999 chapters per each Playlist and
Original List
DISPLAY to exit.
* The recording time is an estimate and actual recording
time may differ.
* Audio and video quality decreases as the recording time
becomes longer.
Video mode DVD:99 titles per disc
99 chapters per title
* Each time you press REC MODE,remaining recording
time is displayed.
30
Recording / Dubbing
Information on Supported Media (Cont’d)
About DVR (HDD)
What is CPRM?
DVR is a special component which has high recording densi-
ty and is suited for long-time recording or high-speed cueing
but by contrast,has many factors which can cause breakage.
Use DVR on the premise that you should dub the recorded
programs to a DVD disc or a videotape to protect your pre-
cious videos.
This is a format used to record copy-once programs.
By recording coded data on the area of discs that ordi-
nary writing software cannot write,it prevents copy-
once programs from being recorded repeatedly on dif-
ferent media.
This unit is CPRM compatible,which means that you
can record copy-once broadcast programs,but then
you cannot make a copy of those recordings.CPRM
recordings can only be made on the DVR orVR mode
DVD-RW disc,and CPRM recordings can only be
played back on DVD players that are compatible with
CPRM.
DVR is a temporary storage location.
DVR is not a permanent storage location of the recorded
contents.Be sure to use it as a temporary storage location
until you watch the programs once,edit them,or dub them
to a DVD disc or a videotape.
Information on copy control
Be sure to dub (back up) data promptly if you
find abnormalities in DVR.
Some satellite broadcasts include copy protected informa-
tion.For their recording,refer to the following.
If there is mechanical trouble with the DVR,grinding or oth-
er sounds may be heard or blocky noise may appear on
the image.If you continue to use as it is,deterioration may
continue and eventually the DVR may not be used at all.If
you notice these symptoms of a failing DVR,promptly dub
the data to a DVD disc or a videotape.
Copy-
Copy
-once
Copy
-free
Disc type / format
prohibited
DVR
ver.1.1,1.2
VR
DVD-RW
ver.1.1,1.2 CPRM compatible
When an DVR fails,recovery of recorded content (data)
may be impossible.
ver.1.1,1.2
Video
DVD-RW
ver.1.1,1.2 CPRM compatible
About the remaining capacity of DVR record-
ing time:
ver.2.0
DVD-R
VCR
In recording to DVR,the Remaining Capacity Display may
differ from the actual recordable time as this unit adopts
Variable Bit Rate encoding,which varies the recording (stor-
age) amount of data in conformity with the information
amount of video.Before recording to the DVR,ensure there
is sufficient space on the DVR by deleting unnecessary titles
in advance.(Remaining capacity will not increase if you only
delete Playlists.)
Recordable
Not Recordable
Making discs playable on other DVD player
(Finalize)
After recording,you must finalize the disc in order to play
on other units.(See page 63.)
* ForVideo mode discs,the finalization is required.
* ForVR mode discs,the finalization is recommended.
* For the information on videotapes,refer to‘VCR
functions’ on pages 121-127.
Playable
OPEN
/
CLOSE
POWER
S
T
O
P
/
E
J
E
C
T
R
E
W
F.FWD
PLAY
REC/OTR
CHANNEL
DUBBING
VCR
DVR
DVD
STOP
PLAY
D
V
R
R
E
C
/
O
T
R
D
V
D
VCR
DVD
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
DVR
DVD
VCR
DVR/DVD
This Unit
DVD player
Not Playable
31
Recording / Dubbing
Easy DVR / DVD Recording
The following will help you to understand easily how to record to the internal DVR or to DVDs.
Note:Make sure batteries are in the remote control and you have connected this unit and theTV correctly.
Step 1:Choose a disc type & the Recording Format.(Only if you are recording to DVD.)
There are several types of recordable DVDs to choose from. Choose a recordable disc
type based on your playback / recording / editing needs. Refer to‘Information on Supported
Media’ on pages 29-31 to determine which disc type is most suited for your needs. Also,
refer to page 34 to set the Recording Format for your disc.
or
This unit can record on the type of discs on the right.
Step 2:Preparing the media
1Turn on the unit.
2 Select the device you want to use.
(If you are recording to the DVR,
skip to step 3 on the next page.)
4 Close the disc tray.
3 Open the disc tray,and
place a disc on the tray.
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
POWER
POWER
POWER
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
PROG. SELECT
POWER
PROG. SELECT
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
CHANNEL
DVD
GHI
JK
MNO
DVR
VCR
REC MONITOR
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
It may take a while to
load the disc.
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
SPACE
0
SPACE
0
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
• If you load a brand new DVD-RW disc, Auto Format will start automatically.
Continue on the next page.
Note
DVR is a temporary storage location.
• DVR is not a permanent storage location of the recorded contents. Be sure to use it as a temporary storage
location until you watch the programs once, edit them, or dub them to a DVD disc or a videotape.
32
Recording / Dubbing
Easy DVR / DVD Recording (Cont’d)
Step 3:Select the Rec Mode.
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
DVD
VCR
DVR
REC MONITOR
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DVR
CH8
LP 65:56
Step 4:Select the desired channel to record.
CH
8
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
POWER
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
CHANNEL
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
SPACE
0
PROGRAM
Step 5:Start Recording.
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
DVD
• When recording to the DVR:
DVR MODE
VCR
DVR
DVD
VCR
DVR
REC MONITOR
REC MONITOR
Press REC / OTR (DVR).
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
• When recording to the DVD:
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
Press REC / OTR (DVD).
or
I
DVR Rec
0:06:50
CH8
LP 65:56
Step 6:Stop Recording.
SKIP
REPLAY
PLAY
SKIP
DVR MODE
REV
FWD
SLOW
STOP
DVR
PAUSE
DVD
VCR
REC MONITOR
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
This operation may take
a while to be recognized.
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
IC
DVR Rec Stop
LP 65:56
0:06:50
CH8
33
Recording / Dubbing
Formatting a Disc
Selecting the Recording FormatType
VR
Video
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
Selecting the recording format type
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
POWER
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
The recording format type you set here will be
memorized and applied to the disc whenever you format
DVD-RW discs.
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
CHANNEL
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
Press SETUP.
1
“Easy Setting Menu” or “Advanced Menu” will appear.
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
Advanced Menu
SPACE
0
DVD Menu
DVRMenu
InitialSetup
Timer Program
DVD Disc Format
DVD Recording Format
PROGRAM
SETUP
AUDIO
CLEAR
RECORDINGS
Finalize
Disc Protect
Delete Playlist
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
Easy Setting Menu
ENTER
DISPLAY
RETURN
Using
Press ENTER.
/
,select “DVD Menu”.
2
3
VARIABLE VARIABLE
REPLAY
SKIP
SKIP
Using
Press ENTER.
/
,select “DVD Recording Format”.
REV
PLAY
FWD
Option window will appear.
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
DVD
DVD Recordding Format
VCR
DVR
REC MONITOR
VR
Video
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
Using
Press ENTER.
/
,select “VR” or “Video”.
4
Your setting is now activated.
• The default setting is “Video”.
Auto Format
Whenever you load a brand new DVD-RW disc, the
unit will automatically format the disc in the
recording format type you set in this section.
The following message will appear if a Timer
Recording is programmed to start in 15 minutes:
“In the middle of programming timer.
Format disc?”
If you select “Yes”, the formatting process will
continue. If you select “No”, or do not replay in 1
minute, the formatting will not be performed.
Note
• The Recording Format Setting is effective only for
DVD-RW discs.You cannot change the recording
format for a DVD-R disc. DVD-R discs will always be
inVideo mode.
Auto Format will not be performed under
the conditions listed below;
- During DVR Playback or recording.
• You cannot mix two formats on one DVD-RW
disc.When you load a disc once recorded
before, the recording format cannot be
changed even if you change it in the Setup
Menu.
34
Recording / Dubbing
Formatting a Disc (Cont’d)
Formatting a Pre-Recorded Disc
Formatting is complete when the progress bar reach-
es to the right end.
6
(Disc Format)
VR
Video
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
If you format a pre-recorded disc,all the data contained in it
will be erased and the disc will return to the blank media
status.This feature is only available with the DVD-
RW disc.
Press SETUP.
Completed
1
“Easy Setting Menu” or “Advanced Menu” will appear.
The screen returns to normal after formatting is
completed.
Advancced Menu
DVD Menu
DVRMenu
InitialSetup
Timer Program
DVD Disc Format
This operation may take a
while to be completed.
DVD Recording Format
Finalize
Disc Protect
Delete Playlist
Note
Easy Setting Menu
• When you reformat the disc, all contents of the disc
will be erased.
• A disc once formatted with this unit cannot be used
on other DVD recorders unless finalized.
Using
Using
/
/
,select “DVD Menu”. Press ENTER.
2
3
,select “DVD Disc Format”.
Press ENTER.
Confirmation window will appear.
Format ddisc?
Yes
No
Using
/
,select “Yes”. Press ENTER.
4
5
Final confirmation window will appear.
Are you sure?
Yes
No
Using
/
,select “Yes”. Press ENTER.
Formatting will start.
The progress bar extends depending on the
progress status of formatting.
DVD Disc Format
35
Recording / Dubbing
Monitoring the Recording Quality
VR
DVD-RW
Video
DVD-RW
DVD-R
DVR
With REC MONITOR,you can check how the actual
recording picture and the sound quality will be in the select-
ed Rec Mode before attempting to record.
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
POWER
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
If you are recording to the DVR,press DVR first.
If you are recording to a disc,press DVD first.
CHANNEL
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
While in the stop mode,press REC MONITOR.
1
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
SPACE
0
PROGRAM
SETUP
AUDIO
CLEAR
RECORDINGS
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
DVR
XP 17:32
CH8
Rec Monitor
ENTER
DISPLAY
RETURN
Indicates the remaining time of the disc
when recorded with the selected Rec Mode.
VARIABLE VARIABLE
REPLAY
SKIP
SKIP
REV
PLAY
FWD
Press REC MODE repeatedly to change the Rec
Mode.
2
3
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
DVD
The Rec Mode will be changed as you press the
button as shown below. Refer to ‘Rec Mode’ on
page 30.
VCR
DVR
REC MONITOR
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
• You cannot change the Rec Mode during
recording.
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
XP
SP
LP
SEP
SLP
EP
Press REC MONITOR again to exit.
36
Recording / Dubbing
Creating Chapter MarksAutomatically
VR
DVD-RW
Video
DVD-RW
DVD-R
DVR
You can sort out the recording by inserting chapter marks
every set time interval.
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
POWER
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
Press SETUP.
1
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
“Easy Setting Menu” or “Advanced Menu” will appear.
If “Advanced Menu” is displayed,proceed to step 3.
Easy Setting Menu
CHANNEL
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
DVD Menu
DVRMenu
InitialSetup
Timer Program
DVD Disc Format
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
DVD Recording Format
Finalize
SPACE
0
Disc Protect
Delete Playlist
PROGRAM
SETUP
AUDIO
CLEAR
RECORDINGS
Advanced Menu
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
Using
Press ENTER.
/
,select “Advanced Menu”.
2
3
ENTER
DISPLAY
RETURN
Using ,select “Initial Setup”.Press ENTER.
/
Advanced Menu
VARIABLE VARIABLE
REPLAY
SKIP
SKIP
DVD Menu
OSD Language
Clock Setting
Channel Setting
Playback
DVR Menu
REV
PLAY
FWD
Initial Setup
Timer Program
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
DVD
Record
Display
VCR
DVR
REC MONITOR
Easy Setting Menu
Reset to factory default
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
Using
/
,select “Record”. Press ENTER.
4
5
Record Menu will appear.
Record
Auto Fiinalize
Auto Chhapter
Using
/
,select “Auto Chapter”. Press ENTER.
Option window will appear.
Auto Chapter
Off
5 minutes
10 minutes
Display
15 minutes
30 minutes
60 minutes
Notes for“Auto chapter”
• The actual setting time for chapter marks may differ
from the time you selected inVideo mode.
• Depending the recording time, a chapter with no
image may be created at the end.
Using
Press ENTER.
/
,select desired time option.
6
7
Your setting is now activated.
• The default setting is “10 minutes”.
•
Chapter marks will automatically be inserted at the set
interval with “Auto Chapter”. (Chapter marks will
not be inserted while recording is paused.) For inserting
chapter marks at other spots, refer to ‘Chapter Marker’
on pages 104-107.
Press SETUP to exit.
•
WithVideo mode DVDs discs, you cannot add /
delete chapter marks.
37
Recording / Dubbing
Basic Recording
VR
DVD-RW
Video
DVD-RW
DVD-R
DVR
Follow steps below to recordTV programs.
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
POWER
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
Use only the DVR or CPRM-compatibleVR mode DVD-RW
discs for recording copy-once programs.(See page 31.)
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
If you are recording to the DVR,press DVR first.
If you are recording to a disc,press DVD first.
Insert a recordable disc if you are recording to a DVD.
CHANNEL
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
Turn on the TV. Select the appropriate external input
channel. (See page 18.)
1
SPACE
0
PROGRAM
Using REC MODE,select a Rec Mode.
SETUP
AUDIO
CLEAR
RECORDINGS
2
Refer to ‘Rec Mode’ on page 30.
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
Using CHANNEL
Buttons,select a desired channel to record.
/
,or the Number
3
4
ENTER
CH
8
DISPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE VARIABLE
REPLAY
SKIP
SKIP
Press REC / OTR (DVR / DVD) to start recording.
REV
PLAY
FWD
The information will be displayed for 5 seconds.
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
DVD
DVR MODE
VCR
DVR
REC MONITOR
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DVR Rec
0:06:50
CH8
I
LP 65:56
Press PAUSE F to pause recording.
Press REC / OTR (DVR / DVD) or PAUSE F to
resume recording.
Press STOP C to stop recording.
5
Note
• Recording starts immediately after you press
REC / OTR (DVD) and continues until the disc is
full or you stop recording.
• When the Clock Setting has not been made, the
space for a date and time of title names in the
Original List or Playlist will be blank.
• When you record aTV program broadcasted
in both Stereo and SAP-audio on a DVD-RW/R
discs, you have to select theTV channel audio
(Stereo or SAP) beforehand. Only the selected
channel audio will be recorded. Refer to ‘TV
Audio Setting’ on page 27 for more details.
• Up to 300 titles can be recorded on the DVR.
•
Up to 99 titles can be recorded on the DVD-RW/R discs.
38
Recording / Dubbing
OneTouch Recording (OTR)
VR
DVD-RW
Video
DVD-RW
Press REC / OTR (DVR / DVD) repeatedly to change
the recording time.
DVD-R
DVR
5
This is a simple way to set the recording time in blocks of
30 minutes.
DVR MODE
If you are recording to the DVR,press DVR first.
If you are recording to a disc,press DVD first.
Preparing for OTR:
• Check that the recording media has enough recordable
space for the time you set.
• If you are recording to a DVD,insert a recordable disc.
• Use only the DVR or CPRM-compatibleVR mode DVD-
RW discs for recording copy-once programs.
(See page 31.)
DVR Rec
LP
0:06:50
CH8
I
OTR (0:30)
0:30
(Normal Recording) 1:00
Turn on the TV. Select the appropriate external input
channel. (See page 18.)
1
8:00
7:30
Using REC MODE,select a Rec Mode.
2
The recording time will be extended by 30 minutes
every time you press REC / OTR (DVR / DVD).
Refer to ‘Rec Mode’ on page 30.
• You can check the current Rec Mode by pressing
REC MONITOR.
• The maximum recording time is 8 hours.
• With DVR / DVD OTR, the recording time that
exceeds the remaining time of the recording
media will not be displayed.
Using CHANNEL
Buttons,select a desired channel to record.
/
or the Number
3
4
• To change the recording time during the
One Touch Recording, Press REC / OTR (DVR /
DVD) repeatedly.
Press REC / OTR (DVR / DVD).
Recording will start.
DVR MODE
When OTR ends,the unit will turn off automatically
except under conditions listed below.
- If aTimer Recording is programmed to start in 5
minutes.
6
- During playback of DVR / DVD /VCR.
- During recording of DVR / DVD /VCR.
-While displaying menus or information on the
screen.
DVR Rec
0:06:50
CH8
I
LP 65:56
• To cancel the OTR in progress,press STOP C.
Note
• The remaining recording time will be displayed on the
Front Panel Display during a One Touch Recording.
Press DISPLAY to see it on the TV screen.
• You cannot pause a One Touch Recording.
• The unit will turn off automatically under the
following conditions.
- When a power failure occurs.
39
Recording / Dubbing
Timer Recording
VR
DVD-RW
Video
DVD-RW
DVD-R
DVR
You can program the unit to record up to 32 programs within a
month in advance.Daily or weekly recordings are available.
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
POWER
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
Preparing forTimer recording:
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
• Be sure to set the clock before programming aTimer
Recording.Refer to‘Clock Setting’ on pages 24-26.
• Check that the recording media (internal DVR or DVD)
has enough recordable space for the time you set.
• Insert a recordable disc if you are recording to a DVD.
Use only the DVR or CPRM-compatibleVR mode DVD-RW
discs for recording copy-once programs.
CHANNEL
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
SPACE
0
PROGRAM
SETUP
AUDIO
CLEAR
RECORDINGS
Press TIMER PROG.
1
Timer Program List will appear.
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
1/ 1
TIMER PROGRAMMING
Fri FEB/ 3
Date
9:10AM
DVR LP 52:38
ENTER
Start Time End Time
New Program
CH Rec To Mode
DISPLAY
RETURN
•
You can access this screen from the Setup Menu also.
VARIABLE VARIABLE
REPLAY
SKIP
SKIP
Using ,select a line indicated “New
Program”. Press ENTER.
/
REV
PLAY
FWD
2
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
DVD
Timer Programming Window will appear.
VCR
DVR
REC MONITOR
4
5
6
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
Date
Rec To
Mode
Start Time
End Time
CH
8
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
Fri FEB/
3
9
:
10 AM
10
:
10 AM
DVR
LP
DVR LP
0:39
1
2
3
7
40
Recording / Dubbing
Timer Recording (Cont’d)
1 Recording Date:
To exit,press TIMER PROG.
5
When pressing
will change as follows.
at the current date, the setting
•
If you turn the unit off, it automatically turns on and starts
recording 3 minutes before the Timer Recording begins,
and when the recording is completed, you will be asked
whether to turn off the unit.The unit will be turned off
automatically if you select “Yes” or if you do not reply
in 1 minute.
e.g.: January 1st
JAN / 01
Mon-Sun
Mon-Sat
Mon-Fri
Sat
•
To stop recording in progress, press STOP C and hold it
for 2 seconds, or press STOP C on the front panel.
Relay Recording
If the disc runs out of the space duringTimer
Recording to a DVD,or if there is no recordable disc
in the unit,it automatically detects it and change the
recording media to the DVR. This feature is available
only forTimer Recording. Not available for OTR.
Fri
Sun
JAN / 31
Note
• If you have not set the clock yet:
2 Start Time:
The Clock Setting Window will appear at step 1 in
stead of Timer Program List. Continue with step 4 in
‘Auto Clock Setting’ on page 24 or ‘Manual Clock
Setting’ on page 25 before setting a Timer Recording.
• After step 5, you can use other devices as usual.
• If a basic recording or One Touch Recording is in
progress on theVCR and the Timer Recording set for
DVR or DVD is about to begin, the unit will
automatically switch to the programmed channel 15
seconds before the programmed time, and the
recording in progress on theVCR will be cancelled
UNLESS their recording channel is the same. If their
recording channel is the same, the Timer Recording
for DVR or DVD will start without cancelling the
recording currently in progress on theVCR. In this
case, the recording of the same channel will be made
on bothVCR and the DVR or DVD.
3 EndTime:
4 Recording Channel:
To record from the external input,select “L1” or
“L2”.(Using camcorder,or other source.)
5 Recording Media (DVR or DVD):
To record onto the DVR,select “DVR”.
To record onto a disc,select “DVD”.
VCR is not compatible withTimer Recording.
6 Rec Mode:
Refer to ‘Rec Mode’ on page 30.
7 Available recording time left on the DVR / DVD
under the programmed Rec Mode.
• If there are more than one program, the recording
time of the programs other than the one being
edited currently will not be counted in the
calculation of the total remaining time on the disc.
• If the starting time and the end time are the same, it
will be recognized as 24 hours recording.
• If the starting time you entered is already in the past,
the recording will start as soon as you activate the
Timer Recording by pressing ENTER at step 4.
Using
/
,select an item to set and using
3
4
/
,set the contents to suit your preference.
• Pressing RETURN
information entered.
will resets all the
•
If the Timer Recording you want to make starts at 11:00
P.M., for example, and ends at 1:00 A.M. next day, enter
the date of the starting time, then enter the starting
time as 11:00 P.M. and end time as 1:00 A.M.
Press ENTER when all the information is entered.
will appear in the Front Panel Display indicating
one or moreTimer Recordings are in standby.
• To set another program, repeat steps 2 to 4.
•
When programs are overlapped, a warning message
will appear. For details on overlapped Timer
Programmings, refer to ‘Hints for Timer Recording’
on page 43.
41
Recording / Dubbing
Timer Recording (Cont’d)
Editing theTimer Programming
Information
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
POWER
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
PressTIMER PROG.
1
Timer Program List will appear.
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
1/ 1
TIMER PROGRAMMING
CHANNEL
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
Fri FEB/ 3
9:10AM
DVR LP 52:38
Date
Start Time End Time
CH Rec To Mode
Fri FEB/ 3
Fri FEB/ 3
9:00AM
9:30AM
10:00AM
10:30AM
11:00AM
8
6
4
DVR
DVR
DVR
LP
LP
LP
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
Fri FEB/ 3 10:30AM
SPACE
0
Using
Press ENTER.
/
,select the program you want to edit.
2
PROGRAM
SETUP
AUDIO
CLEAR
RECORDINGS
Editing Menu will appear.
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
Program Change
Edit Title Name
Delete
ENTER
DISPLAY
RETURN
To change the setting of a program:
VARIABLE VARIABLE
3
REPLAY
SKIP
SKIP
1. Using
/
, select “Program Change”, then
press ENTER.
REV
PLAY
FWD
Timer ProgrammingWindow will appear.
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
DVD
Date
Rec To
Mode
Start Time
End Time
CH
6
VCR
DVR
REC MONITOR
Fri FEB/
3
9
: 30 AM
10
:
30 AM
DVR
LP
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DVR LP
0:39
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
2. Using
/
, move to the item you want to
change, then press
/
to change the setting.
To edit a title name:
1. Using
/
, select “EditTitle Name”, then
press ENTER.
EditingWindow will appear.
TIMER PROGRAMMING
_
A
F
K
P
U
Z
1
!
B
G
L
Q
V W
C
H
M
R
D
I
N
S
X
E
J
O
T
Y
a
f
k
p
u
z
6
&
:
b
g
l
q
v
c
h
m
r
w
d
i
n
s
x
e
j
o
t
Space
Right
Left
BS
Clear
y
2
"
,
3
#
-
4
$
.
5
%
/
7
'
;
8
(
<
|
9
)
=
}
0
*
>
~
+
?
[
]
^
_
{
@
Decide
Return
2. By following the steps in ‘Guide to Edit Title
Name’ on page 95, edit the title name.
When you finish entering the title name,
press PLAY B. Or using
/
/
/
, select
“Decide”, then press ENTER.
42
Recording / Dubbing
Timer Recording (Cont’d)
To delete a program from the list:
1. Using , select “Delete”, then press
ENTER.
Hints forTimer Recording
The priority of overlapped settings
When the timer programmings are overlapped,you will
receive a warning message.
If this happens,check the timer programming and change the
programming as necessary.Otherwise,the unit will prioritize
recording as described below.
/
Confirmation window will appear.
Delete this Timer Program?
Yes
No
Same start time and different end time:
The program set first has the priority.
You can access this screen by pressing CLEAR
instead of ENTER at step 2.
PROG. 1
PROG. 2
2. Using
the title.
/
, select “Yes” if you want to delete
Actual
recording
PROG. 1
PROG. 2
PressTIMER PROG. to exit.
4
The first 15 seconds (at the longest) will be cut off.
Different start time and different end time:
A program with the earlier start time has the priority.
Note
• As to the timer program in progress (which is shown
in red in the Timer Program List), you only can edit
the end time.The changes made during recording will
be recognized as only specific to that recording in
progress and it will not affect the daily or the Weekly
Recording Setting.
PROG. 1
PROG. 2
PROG. 3
PROG. 3
PROG. 2
Actual
PROG. 1
recording
The first 15 seconds (at the longest) will be cut off.
Recording time is entirely overlapped:
PROG.2 will not be recorded.
PROG. 1
PROG. 2
Actual
recording
PROG. 1
End time of Program 1 is the same as the
start time of Program 2:
PROG. 1
PROG. 2
Actual
PROG. 1
PROG. 2
recording
The last 30 seconds (at the longest) will be cut off.
The amount of time cut off differs depending on the
recording media.
43
Recording / Dubbing
Recording & Playback Navigator
Guide to the Programmed
Recordings Screen
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
POWER
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
DVR
With the Recording & Playback Navigator,you can easily
program theTimer Recordings for the DVR by using the
calender displayed on the screen. Also the recorded titles
(programs) can be played back or edited just by selecting the
titles on the display.
• The Recording & Playback Navigator is only available for
the DVR Original List.
• When you press PROGRAM RECORDINGS,the
Programmed Recordings Screen will be displayed on the
TV screen.
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
CHANNEL
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
SPACE
0
PROGRAM
SETUP
AUDIO
CLEAR
RECORDINGS
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
1
2
Programmed Recordings Screen
ENTER
DISPLAY
RETURN
PROGRAMMED RECORDINGS
Completed
Scheduled
VARIABLE VARIABLE
REPLAY
SKIP
SKIP
6:00AM - 7:00AM
CH 8ch XP
REV
PLAY
FWD
Previous Recordings
Scheduled Recordings
SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT
SAT SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI
TODAY
AM
CH
2
4
5
6
7
8
9
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
DVD
CH
8
A
CH
B
4
VCR
DVR
REC MONITOR
CH
6
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
3
4
1 Preview window:
Playback the preview of recorded programs.
2 Information:
Shows the information on the selected program.
3 Previous recordings:
Note
When the normal recording /Timer Recording has start-
ed,the cell turns blue and the channel number will be dis-
played.(e.g.[A])
• With the Recording & Playback Navigator, you can
program Timer Recordings up to one week ahead.
The recordings programmed for the days more than
one week ahead will not be displayed in the
Programmed Recordings Screen.
4 Scheduled Recordings:
When a programming is completed,the cell turns pink and
the channel number will be displayed.(e.g.[B])
• You can program more than 1 Timer Recordings in
one cell, but only the timer program that has the
earlier starting time will be displayed in the
Programmed Recordings Screen.
• To see all the programs entered in a cell, press
REV h or FWD g.
• If power is failed or unplugged from the outlet, some
information in the Programmed Recordings Screen
may be lost.
• Only the titles in the DVR Original List can be played
back using the Recording & Playback Navigator.
Programmed Recordings Screen shows a two-week calendar.
(One week prior to and one week after the current day.)
• Programmed Recordings can be programmed in this
screen for programs broadcasted during next week.
• If more than one week has passed since recording,the
recorded programs cannot be replayed or edited with
Programmed Recordings.
• The screen describes each day as a day of the week,oth-
er thanTODAY.
44
Recording / Dubbing
Recording & Playback Navigator (Cont’d)
Programming a Recording with
the
To Change or Cancel the
Program
Recording & Playback
Navigator
DVR
DVR
Repeat steps 1-2 above.
1
2
Before programming,be sure to select the desired Rec
Mode.(See page 36 on how to select the Rec Mode.)
Press ENTER to call up the menu window.
Press PROGRAM RECORDINGS.
Switches to the DVR mode, and the Programmed
Recordings Screen will appear.
1
Program Change
Display
Timer Program
New Program
Using
/
/
/
,select the desired cell.
2
• For example, to record from 4:00 pm two days
from the present day, choose the cell as follows.
To change the program
3
Using
/
, select “Program Change”, then
ordings
Scheduled Recordings
press ENTER.
Timer Programming Window will appear.
Correct the information, then press ENTER.
THU FRI
SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT
TODAY
PM
3
4
5
To cancel the program
Using
/
, select “Timer Program”, then
Present day
Cell
press ENTER.
Timer Programming List will appear.
Press CLEAR .
Tomorrow
Day after tomorrow
There are two ways to program a recording.
1) Direct Program---Press CHANNEL
Confirmation window will appear. Select “Yes”, and
press ENTER.
/
or
the Number Buttons to select a channel. Press
ENTER.The cell turns pink indicating that the
timer programming is now set in that cell.
Press PROGRAM RECORDINGS to exit.
To program a newTimer Recording
Using
/
, select “New Program”, then
press ENTER.
2) Detailed Program---Press ENTER
“New Program” will appear.With “New
Program” selected, press ENTER again.
Timer Programming Window will appear.
Press TIMER PROG. to exit.
4
Date
Rec To
Mode
Start Time
End Time
CH
8
Fri FEB/
3
9
:
00 AM
10
:
00 AM
DVR
LP
DVR LP
0:39
Enter the necessary information by following the
instructions described in ‘Timer Recording’ on pages
40-43.
45
Recording / Dubbing
Recording & Playback Navigator (Cont’d)
Playback and Edit with
Programmed Recordings
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
POWER
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
DVR
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
Press PROGRAM RECORDINGS.
1
2
3
The unit switches to the DVR mode, and the
Programmed Recordings Screen will appear.
CHANNEL
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
Using
/
/
/
,select the recorded program.
SPACE
0
The recorded program plays back in the preview
window.
PROGRAM
SETUP
AUDIO
CLEAR
RECORDINGS
Press ENTER to call up the menu window.
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
Play From Start
Resume Play
Edit
ENTER
Previous Recordings
DISPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE VARIABLE
Using
Press ENTER.
/
,select “Play From Start”.
REPLAY
SKIP
SKIP
4
REV
PLAY
FWD
The recorded program is played back.
If you want to resume playback from the last
viewed point:
Select “Resume Play” in step 3.
Refer to ‘Resume Playback’ on page 72.
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
DVD
VCR
DVR
REC MONITOR
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
To edit a title:
Select “Edit” in step 3.
Refer to ‘Guide to Edit Title Name’ on page 95.
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
To display aTitle List:
Select “Previous Recordings” in step 3.
Refer to ‘Playback from the Title List’ on page 68.
46
Recording / Dubbing
Information on Dubbing
VR
DVD-RW
Video
DVD-RW
Available Dubbing Direction for Copy-Once
Program
DVD-R
DVR
VCR
You can copy a DVR/DVD disc to a videotape or copy a
videotape to a DVR/DVD disc.This function will be possible
only if the DVD disc or the videotape is not copy protected.
Before starting this function,prepare for the recording on
the DVD-RW/R disc or the videotape.Refer to page 32
(DVR/DVD) or page 122 (VCR).
(O=Available X=Not Available)
From
To
DVD-RW(VR)
O*1,*2
X
(CPRM-combatible)
DVR
DVD-RW
(Video)
(Internal)
DVD-R
Videotape
X
Difference between (dubbing) Copy and Move
O *2
COPY (dubbing)
program
MOVE
DVR (Internal)
X
DVD-RW(VR)
Videotape
Videotape
O *2
O
program
DVR (Internal)
DVD-RW(VR)
(CPRM-combatible)
DVD-RW(VR)
(Not CPRM-combatible)
DVD-R
DVR
(internal)
DVR
(internal)
O *2
The program remains
The program does not remain
X
X
program
program
*1:The program (recorded) moves.(It will be deleted from
DVR.)
*2:You cannot dub the recorded program to DVR or DVD-
RW again.(Copy control signal will be recorded to the
videotape.)
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
Note for dubbing
• When you dub using DUBBING MENU, be aware
that all the programs in the Dubbing List will be
erased when you switch Original List and Playlist, if
you want to dub programs from the both lists ,
(Original List and Playlist), finish up the dubbing of
one list first and then make dubbing of the other list.
47
Recording / Dubbing
OneTouch Dubbing from DVR to DVD
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
POWER
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
With OneTouch Dubbing,you can start dubbing right away
with just one touch.
• Recordable DVD must be in the unit.(See pages 29-31.)
• There should be enough space on the recording DVD.
• Make sure to press the corresponding Device Select
Button before using the device of your choice.
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
CHANNEL
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
Limitations:
• You cannot dub to the finalizedVideo mode DVDs.
• You cannot dub to the protectedVR mode DVDs.
• If the unit detects that the dubbing will not finish by 3
minutes before theTimer Recording,the dubbing cannot
be started.Be noted that with DVR to DVD dubbing,the
duration of the dubbing is the duration of the
dubbing title (except for the High Speed Dubbing).
• If a copy control signal is detected,the dubbing cannot
be started.
SPACE
0
PROGRAM
SETUP
AUDIO
CLEAR
RECORDINGS
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
ENTER
• You cannot dub to the DVD if the number of the titles
or the chapters of the disc is at its limit.
DISPLAY
RETURN
• Dubbing cannot be executed during DVR or DVD
recording.
VARIABLE VARIABLE
REPLAY
SKIP
SKIP
• Dubbing cannot be executed while the Menu Screen is
showing (except for theTitle List).
REV
PLAY
FWD
There are three ways to start OneTouch Dubbing.
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
DVD
1
Method 1:Play the title you want to dub.When it comes to
VCR
DVR
REC MONITOR
the point where you want to start dubbing from,
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
press STOP
C
or PAUSE F. Then,press
DUBBING DVR ➞ DVD on the front panel.
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
The dubbing will start from there to the end.
•
If there is not enough space left on the disc, the
prohibited icon will appear and the dubbing will not
be started.
Method 2:Select the title you want to dub in the Original
List or Playlist.With the title selected (highlight-
ed),press DUBBING DVR ➞ DVD on the
front panel.Or,with the title selected (highlight-
ed),press ENTER to call up theTitle List Menu.
And using
ENTER.
/
,select “Dubbing”.Then press
• The dubbing will start from the beginning of the
title to the end of the title.
• When the disc runs out of the space, dubbing
stops automatically.
OPEN
/
CLOSE
POWER
STOP/EJECT REW
F.FWD
PLAY
REC/OTR
CHANNEL
DUBBING
VCR
DVR
DVD
STOP
PLAY DVR REC/OTR DVD
Method 3: If you press DUBBING DVR ➞ DVD on the
front panel in the stop mode without selecting
anything,the unit will start dubbing the last title
in the Original List or the Playlist.It will start
dubbing the title in the Original List if the
Original List was the last selected list.It will start
dubbing the title in the Playlist if the Playlist was
the last selected list.
VCR
DVD
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
DVR
DVD
VCR
DVR/DVD
DUBBING DVR ➞ DVD
STOP
C
48
Recording / Dubbing
OneTouch Dubbing from DVR to DVD (Cont’d)
•
•
•
If the title was in the resume stop mode, the
dubbing will start from the resume point to the end.
Note for dubbing from DVR to DVD
• You cannot switch the device mode except between
DVD andVCR during DVR to DVD dubbing.
• High speed dubbing is not available for the One
Touch Dubbing.
If the title was in the regular stop mode, the dubbing
will start from the beginning of the title to the end.
If there is not enough space left on the disc, the
prohibited icon will appear and the dubbing will not
be started.
Dubbing
Title
1 : 00 :56 (XP)
Dubbing DVR
XP
DVD
The dubbing will stop automatically when it reaches
the end of the title.If you want to stop the dubbing
manually,follow the following instructions below.
2
To stop the dubbing in preparation mode:
• Press DVD,then press STOP C.
To stop the dubbing in progress:
• Press DVD,then press STOP C and hold it for
2 seconds.Or press STOP C on the front panel.
Dubbing DVR
XP
DVD
C
Dubbing DVR
XP
DVD
This operation may take a
while to be completed.
49
Recording / Dubbing
OneTouch Dubbing fromVideotape to DVD
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
POWER
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
With OneTouch Dubbing feature,you can start dubbing
right away with just one touch.
• Recordable DVD must be in the unit.(See pages 29-31.)
• There should be enough space on the recording DVD.
• A videotape to be dubbed must be in the unit.
• Make sure to press the corresponding Device Select
Button before using the device of your choice.
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
CHANNEL
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
Limitations:
SPACE
0
• You cannot dub to the finalizedVideo mode DVDs.
• You cannot dub to the protectedVR mode DVDs.
• If a copy control signal is detected during dubbing,the
dubbing will be stopped.
• Copy-once programs which are recorded directly from
theTV can be dubbed to the DVR/DVD.
PROGRAM
SETUP
AUDIO
CLEAR
RECORDINGS
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
• Copy-once programs which are copied from the
DVR/DVD to a videotape cannot be dubbed further
from the videotape to the DVR/DVD.
ENTER
DISPLAY
RETURN
• If the unit detects that the dubbing will not finish by 3
minutes before theTimer Recording,the dubbing cannot
be started.Be noted that withVCR to DVD dubbing,the
unit recognize DVD's remaining time as the dubbing
duration although the actual dubbing will end when the
videotape ends.
• You cannot dub to the DVD if the number of the titles
or the chapters of the disc is at its limit.
• Dubbing cannot be executed during recording of any
device.
VARIABLE VARIABLE
REPLAY
SKIP
SKIP
REV
PLAY
FWD
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
DVD
VCR
DVR
REC MONITOR
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
• Dubbing cannot be executed while the Menu Screen is
showing (except for theTitle List).
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
Play the contents you want to dub.When it comes to
the point where you want to start dubbing from,press
1
STOP
C
or PAUSE
F.
Press DUBBING VCR ➞ DVD on the front panel.
The dubbing will start.
2
Dubbing VCR
XP
DVD
F
OPEN
/
CLOSE
POWER
STOP/EJECT REW
F.FWD
PLAY
REC/OTR
CHANNEL
DUBBING
VCR
DVR
DVD
STOP
PLAY DVR REC/OTR DVD
VCR
DVD
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
DVR
DVD
VCR
DVR/DVD
DUBBING VCR ➞ DVD
STOP
C
Dubbing VCR
XP
DVD
I
50
Recording / Dubbing
OneTouch Dubbing fromVideotape to DVD (Cont’d)
To stop the dubbing in preparation mode:
• Press DVD,then press STOP C.
To stop the dubbing in progress:
• Press DVD,then press STOP C and hold it for
2 seconds.Or press STOP C on the front panel.
Dubbing VCR
XP
DVD
C
Dubbing VCR
XP
DVD
This operation may take a
while to be completed.
Note for Dubbing fromVCR to DVD
• When dubbing starts, the video image may be
distorted because of the Digital Tracking function.
This is not a malfunction. Play the videotape until the
image clears up and then, start the dubbing.
• Playback audio is determined by the setting you make
in ‘Setting the Playback audio’ section on page 127.
• Dubbing takes as much time as the playback does.
• You can not switch the device mode except between
DVR and DVD.
51
Recording / Dubbing
Dubbing from DVR / DVD to Videotape
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
POWER
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
You can copy the contents of the DVR / DVD to a video-
tape.
CHANNEL
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
Limitations:
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
• If a copy control signal is detected during dubbing, the
dubbing will be stopped.
SPACE
0
• If the unit detects that the dubbing will not finish by 3
minutes before the Timer Recording, it will display a
confirmation message asking if you really want to
continue with the dubbing. If you select "Yes", you can
continue with the dubbing, and the Timer Recording
will start after the dubbing ends.
PROGRAM
SETUP
AUDIO
CLEAR
RECORDINGS
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
Be noted that with DVR / DVD toVCR dubbing, the
duration of the dubbing is the duration of the dubbing
title.
ENTER
DISPLAY
RETURN
• An error message will appear if you try to add a
program to the Dubbing List when the total playback
time of all the programs in the Dubbing List exceeds
10 hours and 30 minutes.
VARIABLE VARIABLE
REPLAY
SKIP
SKIP
REV
PLAY
FWD
Limitation (DVD toVCR):
• Only the contents of theVR mode DVDs or theVideo
mode DVDs made on this unit can be dubbed. Any
other discs cannot be dubbed.
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
DVD
VCR
DVR
REC MONITOR
Preparing for dubbing:
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
• Insert a recordable videotape with a record tab intact.
• Make sure that the videotape has enough space to
record the contents.
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
• Make sure the desired Rec Mode (SP/SLP) is selected
on theVCR in advance. (See page 122.)
(You can change the Rec Mode during dubbing also.)
Preparing for dubbing (DVD toVCR):
• If you are dubbing from a disc, insert a disc to be
dubbed.
Press DUBBING MENU.
1
The Dubbing Direction and the Rec Mode Menu will
appear.
DUBBING
Dubbing Direction
Rec Mode
High
XP
SP
LP
EP
SLP
SEP
Auto
DVR
DVD
DVR
VCR
DVD
VCR
DVD
DVR
VCR
DVR
VCR
DVD
OPEN
/
CLOSE
POWER
STOP/EJECT REW
F.FWD
PLAY
REC/OTR
CHANNEL
DUBBING
VCR
DVR
DVD
STOP
PLAY DVR REC/OTR DVD
VCR
DVD
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
DVR
DVD
VCR
DVR/DVD
Using
/
,select“DVR ➞VCR” for DVR toVCR
dubbing.Press ENTER.
Using ,select “DVD ➞VCR” for DVD to
2
STOP/EJECT
C
A
/
VCR dubbing.Press ENTER.
Dubbing Top Menu will appear.
Example: DVR ➞VCR
52
Recording / Dubbing
Dubbing from DVR / DVD to Videotape (Cont’d)
DUBBING
Repeat the steps 4 to 5 until you select all programs
to be dubbed.
Dubbing List
6
7
Direction DVR VCR
After selecting all the programs you want,press
RETURN
to go back to the DubbingTop Menu.
Select Program
Dubbing Start
Or press ENTER to call up the option window and
select “Decide”.
Then press ENTER to go back to the DubbingTop Menu.
DUBBING
Dubbing List
2
4
Title 2
Title 4
Direction DVR VCR
Using
/
,select “Select Program”.
3
Press ENTER.
Program List will appear.
Select Program
Dubbing Start
DUBBING
Program List (Original)
Dubbing List
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Title 1
Title 2
Title 3
Title 4
Title 5
Title 6
Title 7
Title 8
Using
Press ENTER.
/
,select “Dubbing Start”.
8
9
Confirmation window will appear.
Start Dubbing?
Yes
No
Using
/
,select a desired program.
4
5
Press ENTER.
Program List Menu will appear.
Using
Dubbing will start.
/
,select “Yes”. Press ENTER.
Add to Duubbing List.
Playlist
Decide
Using
Press ENTER.
/
,select “Add to Dubbing List.”.
DVR
SP
VCR Dubbing
The selected program is now added to the Dubbing List.
DUBBING
• It may take a while to prepare for the dubbing.
Program List (Original)
Dubbing List
Title 2
1
Title 1
Title 2
Title 3
Title 4
Title 5
Title 6
Title 7
Title 8
2
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
To stop the dubbing while in the dubbing
preparation mode:
• Press VCR first,then press STOP C.Or,press
STOP/EJECT
To stop the dubbing in progress:
Press VCR first,then press STOP C and hold it for 2 sec-
onds.Or,press STOP/EJECT A on the front panel.
C
A on the front panel.
•
C
• If you want to select programs from the Playlist,
select “Playlist” and press ENTER to call up the
Playlist.Then follow the steps 4 to 5. (Be noted that
Original List programs and the Playlist programs can
not be entered together in one Dubbing List.)
Note for Dubbing from DVR / DVD
toVideotape
• If more than one program is already in the Dubbing
List, a green line will appear in the Dubbing List.
• You can not change the device mode betweenVCR
and DVR / DVD during the DVR / DVD toVCR
dubbing.
Using
/
move the line to the position you want
to insert the program, then press ENTER.The
program is now inserted in the selected position.
53
Recording / Dubbing
Bi-Directional Dubbing between DVR and DVD
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
POWER
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
You can copy the contents of the DVR to a DVD, or vice
versa.
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
Limitations:
CHANNEL
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
• If the unit detects that the dubbing will not finish by 3
minutes before the Timer Recording, the dubbing
cannot be started. Be noted that with DVR to DVD
dubbing (or vice versa), the duration of the dubbing is
the duration of the dubbing title (except for the High
Speed Dubbing).
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
SPACE
0
PROGRAM
SETUP
AUDIO
CLEAR
RECORDINGS
Limitations (DVR to DVD):
• You cannot dub to the finalizedVideo mode DVDs.
• You cannot dub to the protectedVR mode DVDs.
• If you try to dub copy-once programs, you will be
warned that the copy-once programs cannot be copied
but only be moved. If you still want to continue with
the dubbing (moving), select “Yes” and continue with
the steps. Moving of the copy-once programs is only
available withVR mode DVD-RW (CPRM compatible)
discs.
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
ENTER
DISPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE VARIABLE
REPLAY
SKIP
SKIP
REV
PLAY
FWD
•
An error message will appear if you try to add a program
to the Dubbing List under the following conditions;
- When the number of programs in the “Dubbing
List” exceeds 32 programs.
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
DVD
VCR
DVR
REC MONITOR
- When the total number of titles in the DVD will
exceed 99 titles.
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
- When the total number of chapters in the DVD will
exceed 999 chapters forVR mode DVDs.
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
Limitations (DVD to DVR):
• If a copy control signal is detected during dubbing, the
dubbing will be stopped.
• The contents of theVideo mode DVDs recorded on
other unit cannot be dubbed using this unit.
•
An error message will appear if you try to add a program
to the Dubbing List under the following conditions;
- When the total number of titles will exceed 300
titles.
Preparing for dubbing (DVR to DVD):
• Insert a recordable DVD. (See page 29.)
• Make sure there is enough space on the DVD.
High Speed Dubbing
When dubbing from the DVR Original List to theVR
mode DVD-RW,High Speed Dubbing will be available.
High Speed Dubbing offers you the dubbing speed of
20 times the SEP mode dubbing.To perform the High
Speed Dubbing,select “High” at step 3.
Preparing for dubbing (DVD to DVR):
• Insert a disc to be dubbed.
• Make sure there is enough space on the DVR.
Just Dubbing
When dubbing from DVR to DVD if you select
“Auto” in the Rec Mode Menu,the unit will calculate
the duration of the dubbing material and the remain-
ing time in the disc and automatically select the most
suitable Rec Mode for the dubbing.
54
Recording / Dubbing
Bi-Directional Dubbing between DVR and DVD (Cont’d)
Press DUBBING MENU.
Using
Press ENTER.
Program List Menu will appear.
/
,select a desired program.
1
2
5
The Dubbing Direction and the Rec Mode Menu will appear.
DUBBING
Dubbing Direction
Rec Mode
High
XP
SP
LP
EP
SLP
SEP
Auto
DVR
DVD
DVR
VCR
DVD
VCR
DVD
DVR
VCR
DVR
VCR
DVD
Add to Duubbing List.
Playlist
Decide
Using
Press ENTER.
The selected program is now added to the Dubbing List.
/
,select “Add to Dubbing List.”.
6
Using
DVD dubbing.Press ENTER.
Using ,select “DVD ➞ DVR” for DVD to
/
,select“DVR ➞ DVD” for DVR to
DUBBING
Program List (Original)
Dubbing List
Title 2
/
1
Title 1
Title 2
Title 3
Title 4
Title 5
Title 6
Title 7
Title 8
2
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
DVR dubbing.Press ENTER.
Example: DVR ➞ DVD
DUBBING
Dubbing Direction
Rec Mode
High
XP
SP
LP
EP
SLP
SEP
Auto
DVR
DVD
DVR
VCR
DVD
VCR
DVD
DVR
VCR
DVR
VCR
DVD
• If you want to select programs from the Playlist,
select “Playlist” and press ENTER to call up the
Playlist.Then follow the steps 5 and 6. (Be noted that
Original List programs and the Playlist programs can
not be entered together in one Dubbing List.)
• If more than one program is already in the Dubbing
List, a green line will appear in the Dubbing List.
Using
Press ENTER.
DubbingTop Menu will appear.
/
,select a desired Rec Mode.
3
Using
/
move the line to the position you want
to insert the program, then press ENTER.The
program is now inserted in the selected position.
DUBBING
Dubbing List
Repeat the steps 5 to 6 until you select all programs
to be dubbed.
7
8
Direction DVR DVD
Mode
XP
After selecting all the programs you want,press
Select Program
Dubbing Start
RETURN
to go back to the DubbingTop Menu.
Or press ENTER to call up the option window and
select “Decide”.Then press ENTER to go back to
the DubbingTop Menu.
• If you select “Auto” for the Rec Mode, the unit will
automatically calculate the remaining time and select
the most suitable Rec Mode (DVR to DVD dubbing
only).
• High Speed Dubbing is available only when dubbing the
titles in the DVR Original List to theVR mode DVD.
DUBBING
Dubbing List
2
4
Title 2
Title 4
Direction DVR DVD
Mode XP
Select Program
Dubbing Start
Using
Press ENTER.
Program List will appear.
/
,select “Select Program”.
4
DUBBING
Program List (Original)
Dubbing List
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Title 1
Title 2
Title 3
Title 4
Title 5
Title 6
Title 7
Title 8
55
Recording / Dubbing
Bi-Directional Dubbing between DVR and DVD (Cont’d)
Using
Press ENTER.
Confirmation window will appear.
/
,select “Dubbing Start”.
Note
9
•
When dubbing from DVR to DVD (or vice versa), even
if the selected Rec Mode is set to the higher quality
than that of the material to be dubbed, the program will
not be recorded in the higher quality. It only protects
the current picture quality.
Start Dubbing?
Yes
No
• You cannot switch the device mode between DVR
and DVD during the bi-directional dubbing between
DVR and DVD.
• When you dub a copy-once program from DVR to
DVD, it will be MOVED to the disc (not copied) and
the original data will be erased from the DVR.
Using
/
,select“Yes”.Press ENTER.
Dubbing will start.
Preparing for the dubbing
10
Dubbing
Note on the High Speed Dubbing
• Duration of the High Speed Dubbing will depend on
the Rec Mode, the length, the disc type of the
material to be dubbed.
• High speed Dubbing is available only when dubbing
the titles in the DVR Original List to theVR mode
DVD.
Title
1 : 00 :56 (XP)
Dubbing DVR
DVD
XP
Dubbing DVR
XP
DVD
• It may take a while to prepare for the dubbing.
• During High Speed Dubbing, the playback picture will
not appear.
To stop the dubbing while in the dubbing preparation mode:
•
Press the Device Select Button of the recording device first
(for example,if you are dubbing to DVD,press DVD first),
then press STOP C.
To stop the dubbing in progress:
•
Press the Device Select Button of the recording device first
(for example,if you are dubbing to DVD,press DVD first).
Then press STOP C and hold it for 2 seconds.Or,press
STOP C on the front panel.
56
Recording / Dubbing
Bi-Directional Dubbing between DVR and DVD (Cont’d)
Deleting a Program from
the Dubbing List
Changing the Order of
the Dubbing List
If you are in the DubbingTop Menu,select
If you are in the DubbingTop Menu,select
1
1
“Select Program”,and press ENTER.
Program / Dubbing List will appear.
If you are already in the Program / Dubbing List,
proceed to step 2.
“Select Program”,and press ENTER.
Program / Dubbing List will appear.
If you are already in the Program / Dubbing List
Screen,proceed to step 2.
Press to move to the Dubbing List.
Press to move to the Dubbing List.
2
2
Using
then press ENTER.
Dubbing List Menu will appear.
/
,select a program you want to delete,
Using
then press ENTER.
Dubbing List Menu will appear.
/
,select a program you want to move,
3
3
Delete from Dubbing List.
Position Change
Decide
Delete from Dubbing List.
Position Change
Decide
Using
Press ENTER.
The program is now deleted.
/
,select “Delete from Dubbing List.”.
Using
Press ENTER.
The selected program will be replaced by a single line.
/
,select “Position Change”.
4
5
4
5
Press RETURN
Menu.
to go back to the DubbingTop
Using
then press ENTER.
The program is now inserted in the selected position.
/
,move the line to the desired position,
57
Recording / Dubbing
Dubbing fromVideotape to DVR / DVD
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
POWER
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
You can copy the contents of a videotape to DVR or DVD
disc.
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
CHANNEL
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
Limitation:
• If a copy control signal is detected during dubbing, the
dubbing will be stopped.
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
Limitations (VCR to DVR):
SPACE
0
• If the unit detects that the dubbing will not finish by 3
minutes before the Timer Recording, it will display a
confirmation message asking if you really want to
continue with the dubbing. If you select "Yes", you can
continue with the dubbing, and the Timer Recording
will start after the dubbing ends. Be noted that with
VCR to DVR dubbing, the unit recognize the DVR's
remaining time as the dubbing duration.The maximum
possible duration is 10 hours and 30 minutes.
PROGRAM
SETUP
AUDIO
CLEAR
RECORDINGS
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
ENTER
DISPLAY
RETURN
Limitations (VCR to DVD):
VARIABLE VARIABLE
• You cannot dub to the finalizedVideo mode DVDs.
• You cannot dub to the protectedVR mode DVDs.
• Copy-once programs which are recorded directly from
the TV can be dubbed to the DVR and CPRM
compatibleVR mode DVD-RW.
• Copy-once programs which are copied from the
DVR/DVD to a videotape cannot be dubbed further
from the videotape to the DVR/DVD.
REPLAY
SKIP
SKIP
REV
PLAY
FWD
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
DVD
VCR
DVR
REC MONITOR
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
• If the unit detects that the dubbing will not finish by 3
minutes before the Timer Recording, it will display a
confirmation message asking if you really want to
continue with the dubbing. If you select "Yes", you can
continue with the dubbing, and the Timer Recording
will start after the dubbing ends. Be noted that with
VCR to DVD dubbing, the unit recognize DVD's
remaining time as the dubbing duration although the
actual dubbing will end when the videotape ends.
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
Preparing for dubbing :
• Insert a videotape to be dubbed.
Preparing for dubbing (VCR to DVR):
• Make sure there is enough space on the DVR.
Preparing for dubbing (VCR to DVD):
• Insert a recordable DVD. (See page 29.)
• Make sure there is enough space on the DVD.
58
Recording / Dubbing
Dubbing fromVideotape to DVR / DVD (Cont’d)
Press VCR first.
Using
/
,select “Yes”. Press ENTER.
6
Dubbing will start.
Press PLAY B to start playback of the videotape,and
press STOP C when it reaches the point you want
to start dubbing.
1
2
To stop the dubbing while in the dubbing
preparation mode:
Press DUBBING MENU.
The Dubbing Direction and the Rec Mode Menu will appear.
•
Press the Device Select Button of the recording device first
(for example,if you are dubbing to DVD,press DVD first),
then press STOP C.
DUBBING
Dubbing Direction
Rec Mode
To stop the dubbing in progress:
High
XP
SP
LP
EP
SLP
SEP
Auto
DVR
DVD
DVR
VCR
DVD
VCR
DVD
DVR
VCR
DVR
VCR
DVD
•
Press the Device Select Button of the recording device first
(for example,if you are dubbing to DVD,press DVD first).
Then press STOP C and hold it for 2 seconds.Or press
STOP C on the front panel.
Note
• The device mode change is available only between
DVR and DVD during the videotape to the DVR /
DVD dubbing.
Using
/
,select “VCR ➞ DVR” for DVR
dubbing. Press ENTER.
Using ,select “VCR ➞ DVD” for DVD
3
/
•
After starting dubbing, the picture may be distorted
because of the digital tracking function.This is not a
malfunction. Be advised to playback the videotape until
the picture is stabilized, then set the starting point at
which you wish to start recording, and start dubbing.
dubbing. Press ENTER.
Example:VCR ➞ DVR
DUBBING
Dubbing Direction
Rec Mode
XP
DVR
DVD
DVR
VCR
DVD
VCR
DVD
DVR
VCR
DVR
VCR
DVD
• Playback audio is determined by the setting you make
in the ‘Setting the Playback audio’ section on page
127.
SP
LP
EP
SLP
SEP
Using
Press ENTER.
/
,select a desired Rec Mode.
4
5
Dubbing Top Menu will appear.
DUBBING
Dubbing List
Direction VCR DVR
Mode
XP
Dubbing Start
With “Dubbing Start” selected, press ENTER.
Confirmation window will appear.
Start Dubbing?
Yes
No
59
Recording / Dubbing
Settings for the External Devices
VR
DVD-RW
Video
DVD-RW
DVD-R
DVR
VCR
Connect the external source properly to the unit by using input jacks either LINE2 (Front) or LINE1 (Rear).
When connecting an external equipment of monaural output to this unit,useAUDIO L jack of LINE 1 (Rear) or LINE2
(Front).Use commercially available S-Video orVideo cable and anAudio cable for this type of connection.
OUTPUT
VIDEO AUDIO
OUTPUT
External Device
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
VIDEO AUDIO
(VCR camcorder etc.)
L
R
L
R
or
or
S-Video
cable
Video
cable
Audio
cable
S-Video
cable
Video
cable
Audio
cable
DVR/DVD/VCR
DVR/DV
AUDIO IN
L
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
DVR/DVD/VCR
R
VIDEO IN
IN
To LINE 2 IN
To LINE 1 IN
or
DVR/DVD
DVR/DVD
DVR/DVCR
AUDIO IN AUDIO UT ANTENNA
IN
OPEN
/
CLOSE
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
DVR/D
D
S-VIDEO
Y
L
L
DIGITAL
AUDI
AUDIO OUT
OUT
POWER
STOP/EJECT REW
F.FWD
PLAY
REC/OTR
CHANNEL
DUBBING
VCR
DVR
DVD
STOP
PLAY DVR REC/OTR DVD
//
DVR/DVD/VCR
VCR
DVD
L
PB/CB
R
R
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
COAXIAL
IN
VIDEO IN VIDEO OUT
DVR
DVD
VCR
DVR/DVD
R
PR/CR
OUT
OUT
DVR/DVD
Rear of this unit
Front of this unit
Press SETUP.
“Easy Setting Menu” or “Advanced Menu” will appear.
If “Advanced Menu” is displayed,proceed to step 3.
Using
Press ENTER.
Option window will appear.
/
,select “SelectVideo”.
1
5
6
Example:VR mode DVD-RW disc
Select Video
L1 (Rear)
Easy Settting Menu
DVD Menu
L2 (Front)
DVD Disc Format
DVD Recording Format
DVRMenu
Finalize
InitialSetup
Disc Protect
Timer Program
Using
“L2” (Front).
• If you are using the jacks on the rear,select “L1”.
• If you are using the jacks on the front,select “L2”.
Press ENTER.
/
,select the external input ;“L1” (Rear) or
Delete Playlist
Advanced Menu
Option window will appear.
Using
Press ENTER.
/
,select “Advanced Menu”.
2
3
L1 (Rear)
Video In
Using ,select “Initial Setup”. Press ENTER.
/
S-Video In
Advanced Menu
DVD Menu
OSD Language
Clock Setting
Channel Setting
Playback
DVR Menu
Using
/
,select the video input type you use,
7
8
Video or S-Video,then press ENTER.
Your setting is now activated.
Initial Setup
Timer Program
Record
• The default setting is “Video In”.
Display
Easy Setting Menu
Reset to factory default
Press SETUP to exit.
Using
/
,select “Display”. Press ENTER.
4
Display Menu will appear.
Display
Select Video
FL Dimmer
Screen Saver
60
Recording / Dubbing
Dubbing from the External Devices
VR
DVD-RW
Video
DVD-RW
DVD-R
DVR
VCR
Before recording from the external device,connect the exter-
nal device correctly by following the direction on page 60,and
turn the power of the unit and the external device on.
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
POWER
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
Turn on the TV. Select the appropriate external input
channel. (See page 18.)
1
CHANNEL
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
Select the recording media.
2
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
Recording to DVR: Press DVR first.
Recording to DVD: Press DVD first and insert a
disc. (It may take a while to load the disc.)
Recording to a videotape: Press VCR and insert
a videotape.
SPACE
0
PROGRAM
SETUP
AUDIO
CLEAR
RECORDINGS
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
Select the appropriate external input channel of this
unit by pressing INPUT SELECT. You also can use
3
CHANNEL
/
.
ENTER
• If you are using the jacks on the front set the
channel to L2.
DISPLAY
RETURN
• If you are using the jacks on the rear set the
channel to L1.
VARIABLE VARIABLE
REPLAY
SKIP
SKIP
REV
PLAY
FWD
Select a Rec Mode by pressing REC MODE.
4
Refer to ‘Rec Mode’ on page 30 for DVR/DVD or
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
DVD
page 122 forVCR.
VCR
DVR
REC MONITOR
Press REC/OTR (of the recording device,) on the
unit to start recording.
5
6
7
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
Press PLAY button on the external device to
record from.
For DVR or DVD:
Press STOP C on the recording unit (this unit) first
to stop recording.
This operation may take a
while to be completed.
Then, stop the external device.
ForVCR:
Press STOP / EJECT
C
A on the recording unit
(this unit) first to stop recording.
Then, stop the external device.
REC/OTR (VCR) REC/OTR (DVR/DVD)
OPEN
/
CLOSE
POWER
STOP/EJECT REW
F.FWD
PLAY
REC/OTR
CHANNEL
DUBBING
VCR
DVR
DVD
STOP
PLAY DVR REC/OTR DVD
VCR
DVD
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
DVR
DVD
VCR
DVR/DVD
Note
• To avoid mistakes, it is recommended to use the
buttons on the front panel to operate.
• Read also the instructions for the external device
thoroughly.
POWER
STOP / EJECT
C
A
STOP
C
61
Recording / Dubbing
Protecting a Disc
VR
DVD-RW
To prevent accidental recording,editing or erasing of the
titles,you can protect the whole disc.
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
POWER
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
Press SETUP.
1
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
“Easy Setting Menu” or“Advanced Menu” will appear.
Advanced Menu
CHANNEL
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
DVD Menu
DVRMenu
InitialSetup
Timer Program
DVD Disc Format
DVD Recording Format
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
Finalize
Disc Protect
Delete Playlist
SPACE
0
PROGRAM
SETUP
AUDIO
CLEAR
RECORDINGS
Easy Setting Menu
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
Using
Using
/
/
,select “DVD Menu”. Press ENTER.
2
3
ENTER
,select“Disc Protect”. Press ENTER.
DISPLAY
RETURN
Confirmation window will appear.
VARIABLE VARIABLE
REPLAY
SKIP
SKIP
Protect this disc?
Yes
No
REV
PLAY
FWD
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
DVD
• If the disc has already been protected, “Disc
Undo Protect” will be listed in the menu instead
of “Disc Protect”.To undo the disc protection,
select “Disc Undo Protect” and press ENTER.
VCR
DVR
REC MONITOR
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
Using
/
select “Yes”. Then press ENTER.
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
4
5
Final confirmation window will appear.
Are you sure?
Yes
No
Using
/
,select “YES”. Press ENTER.
The disc will be protected.
Disc Protect
This operation may take a
while to be completed.
Note
• Disc Protect is available only withVR mode DVDs.
62
Recording / Dubbing
Finalizing a Disc
Finalize
VR
Video
DVD-RW
DVD-R
DVD-RW
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
POWER
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
You must first finalize the disc before playing it back on
other unit.
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
Press SETUP.
1
CHANNEL
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
“Easy Setting Menu” or“Advanced Menu” will appear.
Advanced Menu
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
DVD Menu
DVRMenu
InitialSetup
Timer Program
DVD Disc Format
DVD Recording Format
SPACE
0
Finalize
Disc Protect
Delete Playlist
PROGRAM
SETUP
AUDIO
CLEAR
RECORDINGS
Easy Setting Menu
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
Using
ENTER.
/
,select “DVD Menu”,then press
ENTER
2
3
DISPLAY
RETURN
Using
/
,select “Finalize”,then press ENTER.
VARIABLE VARIABLE
REPLAY
SKIP
SKIP
Confirmation window will appear.
REV
PLAY
FWD
Finalize disc?
Yes
No
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
DVD
• If the disc has already been finalized, “Undo
Finalize” will be listed in the menu instead of
“Finalize” (DVD-RW only).To Undo the
finalization of the disc, select “Undo Finalize”
and press ENTER.
VCR
DVR
REC MONITOR
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
Using
/
,select “Yes”,then press ENTER.
4
5
Final confirmation window will appear.
Are you sure?
Yes
No
Using
/
, select “Yes”, then press ENTER.
A progress bar will appear, and finalizing will start.
• If you want to stop the process, press ENTER.
Finalize
Cancel
This operation may take a
while to be completed.
Note
• If
appears when pressing ENTER, that
means the finalizing process has reached the
critical point, and cannot be stopped.
• You cannot cancel finalizing the DVD-R disc once it
has started.
Finalizing ends when the progress bar reaches the
right end.
63
Recording / Dubbing
Finalizing a Disc (Cont’d)
Auto Finalize
Video
DVD-R
DVD-RW
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
This feature allows you to set the unit to automatically
finalize the disc at the specified timing when dubbing to the
Video mode DVDs.This feature is available only with the
Video mode DVDs.
POWER
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
CHANNEL
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
Press SETUP.
“Easy Setting Menu” or “Advanced Menu” will appear.
1
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
Example:DVD-R (Advanced Menu)
Advanced Menu
SPACE
0
DVD Menu
DVD Recording Format
PROGRAM
SETUP
AUDIO
CLEAR
RECORDINGS
Finalize
DVRMenu
InitialSetup
Timer Program
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
Advanced Menu
ENTER
DISPLAY
RETURN
Using
/
,select “Initial Setup”. Press ENTER.
2
Advanced Menu
VARIABLE VARIABLE
REPLAY
SKIP
SKIP
DVD Menu
OSD Language
Clock Setting
Channel Setting
Playback
REV
PLAY
FWD
DVR Menu
Initial Setup
Timer Program
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
DVD
Record
Display
VCR
DVR
REC MONITOR
Easy Setting Menu
Reset to factory default
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
• If you are using the “Easy Setting Menu”, skip
to step 4.
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
Using
/
,select “Record”. Press ENTER.
3
4
Record Menu will appear.
Record
Auto Fiinalizze
Auto Chhapter
Using
Press ENTER.
/
,select “Auto Finalize”.
Option window will appear.
Auto Finalize
Disc Full
End of Timer Rec
End of Dubbing
Disc Full :The unit automatically finalizes the disc
when it becomes full during recording.
End ofTimer Rec :The unit automatically
finalizes the disc when all the Timer Recordings to
a DVD are completed.
End of Dubbing :The unit automatically finalizes
the disc when a dubbing or One Touch Dubbing to
a DVD is completed and when there is no Timer
Recording in standby.
64
Recording / Dubbing
Finalizing a disc (Cont’d)
Using
disc. Press ENTER.
/
,select the desired timing to finalize the
5
Option window will appear.
Example: Disc Full
Disc Full
On
Off
Using
/
,select “On”. Press ENTER.
6
7
Your setting is now activated.
Press SETUP to exit.
Note
• Although finalization is recommended, you may be
able to play theVR mode discs on other unit without
finalizing.With regard to theVideo mode discs, you
MUST finalize them before playing them back on
other unit.
• After DVD-R discs are finalized:
- A DVD Menu is created automatically.
- Undoing the finalization is not possible.
- Additional recording or editing is not possible.
• AfterVideo mode DVD-RW discs are finalized:
- A DVD Menu is created automatically.
- Undoing the finalization is possible.
- Additional recording or editing is possible if you
undo finalize.
• AfterVR mode DVD-RW discs are finalized:
- A DVD Menu is not created.
- Undoing the finalization is possible.
- Additional recording or editing is possible even
without undoing the finalization.
• When DVD Menu is created Title List will no longer
be available.
65
Playback
Playback Information
Before you play back DVD discs,read the following informa-
tion.
Color systems
DVDs are recorded in different color systems throughout
the world. The most common color system is NTSC (which
is used primarily in the United States and Canada).
This unit uses NTSC,you must use DVDs recorded in the
NTSC system. You cannot play back DVDs recorded in oth-
er color systems.
Playable discs
This unit is compatible with the following discs.
To play back a DVD,make sure that it meets the require-
ments for region codes and color systems described in this
section. Discs with the following logos can be played back
on the unit. Playback of other disc types is not guaranteed.
Region codes
This unit has been designed to play back DVD discs with
Region One (1). DVDs must be labeled forALL regions or
for Region 1. You cannot play back DVDs labeled for other
regions. Look for the symbols below on your DVDs. If
these region symbols are not on your DVD,you cannot play
back the DVD on this unit.
Disc
Logo
DVD-VIDEO
DVD-RW
(VIDEO/VR mode)
DVD-R
(VIDEO mode)
The number inside the globe refers to region of the world.
A DVD labeled for a specific region can only be played back
on the unit with the same region code.
CD-DA
(AUDIO CD)
Playback of discs recorded inVideo mode on a
regular DVD player (Video mode)
CD-RW
Discs recorded inVideo mode can be played back on regular
DVD players, including computer DVD drives compatible
with DVD-Video Playback*. You will need to finalize the
discs recorded inVideo mode to play them back on other
DVD players.
(CD-DA FORMAT, MP3 /WMA files)
CD-R
(CD-DA FORMAT, MP3 /WMA files)
*
DVD-Video format (Video mode) is a new format for
recording on DVD-RW/R discs that was approved by the
DVD Forum in 2000. Adoption of this format is optional for
manufacturers of DVD playback devices, and there are DVD-
Video players, DVD-ROM drives or other DVD playback
devices that do not play back DVD-RW/R discs recorded in
the DVD-Video format.
is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing Corporation.
Play the recorded contents
You can select the title you want to play from theTitle List.TheTitle List can easily be accessed by pressing TOP MENU.
The recorded titles can also be called up by pressing PROGRAM RECORDINGS (DVR Original List only).
Start Rec.
Stop/Start
Stop Rec.
What are titles and chapters?
The contents on the DVR / DVD are generally divided into titles. Titles may be fur-
ther divided into chapters.
Title 1
Title 2
What are Original List and Playlist?
Throughout this manual,you will find Original List and Playlist to refer to the
Original content and the edited version.(See page 89.)
Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 1 Chapter 2
• Original List refers to what’s originally recorded on the disc.
• Playlist refers to the edited version of the Original List content.
66
Playback
Basic Playback
Direct Playback
VR
DVD-RW
Video
DVD-RW
DVD-R
DVD-V
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
DVR
CD
POWER
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
If you are playing the DVR,press DVR first.
If you are playing a disc,press DVD first.
CHANNEL
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
Turn on theTV. Select the appropriate external input
channel. (See page 18.)
• If you are playing the DVR,skip to step 4.
1
SPACE
0
PROGRAM
SETUP
AUDIO
CLEAR
RECORDINGS
Press OPEN / CLOSE A to open the disc tray.
2
3
The disc tray will open.
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
Insert your disc with its label facing up. Align the Disc
to the disc tray guide.
ENTER
DISPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE VARIABLE
REPLAY
SKIP
SKIP
REV
PLAY
FWD
disc tray guide
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
DVD
VCR
DVR
REC MONITOR
Press OPEN / CLOSE A again to close the disc
tray.
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
• It may take a while to load the disc.
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
Press PLAY B to start playback.
4
5
Playback will start.
• Depending on the media, the playback may start
from a resume point. (See page 72.)
• If you are playing back a DVD-Video, a Disc Menu
may appear. Refer to page 70 for more details
about the Disc Menu.
Press STOP C to stop playback.
Note
• Some discs may start playback automatically.
67
Playback
Basic Playback (Cont’d)
Playback from theTitle List
VR
DVD-RW
Video
DVD-RW
DVD-R
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
DVR
POWER
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
If you are playing the DVR,press DVR first.
If you are playing a disc,press DVD first.
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
CHANNEL
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
Follow steps 1-3 in‘Direct Playback’ on page 67.
1
2
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
PressTOP MENU.
Title List will appear.
Example: DVR
SPACE
0
PROGRAM
DVR DVD DVD
PL ORG PL
PREVIOUS RECORDINGS
DVR
ORG
SETUP
AUDIO
CLEAR
RECORDINGS
1
2
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
CH12 XP
1
2
5
3
6
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
APR/01/06
12:15PM
MAY/01/06
12:15PM
JUN/04/06
10:00AM
4
ENTER
JUN/15/06
11:05AM
JUL/05/06
11:40PM
JUL/18/06
10:00AM
DISPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE VARIABLE
REPLAY
SKIP
Press MENU / LIST to switch Original List / Playlist
SKIP
if necessary.
REV
PLAY
FWD
• To exit the Title List, press TOP MENU.
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
DVD
Using
/
/
/
,select a desired title,then press
3
4
PLAY B.
Playback will start.
• Use
one,and use FWD D / REV E to jump to the
next / previousTitle List page.
• For DVR, playback will start from the resume
point. If you want to start it from the beginning,
use the Title List Menu.
VCR
DVR
REC MONITOR
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
/
/
/
to move among the titles one by
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
Press STOP C to stop playback.
68
Playback
Basic Playback (Cont’d)
Playback from theTitle List Menu Playback from the DVD Menu
VR
DVD-RW
Video
DVD-RW
Video
DVD-RW
DVD-R
DVD-R
DVR
(Not available for the DVD-Videos,the finalizedVideo mode
DVDs,or theVideo mode discs made on other unit)
If you are playing the DVR,press DVR first.
With finalizedVideo mode DVDs or theVideo mode
DVDs made on other units, a DVD Menu may be
contained instead of the Title List. DVD Menus are
created automatically when you finalize aVideo
mode disc.With such discs,Title List is no longer
available.
If you are playing a disc,press DVD first.
Follow steps 1-3 in‘Direct Playback’ on page 67.
1
2
PressTOP MENU.
Follow the steps below to play back a disc using the
DVD Menu.
Title List will appear.
Example: DVR
Press DVD first.
DVR DVD DVD
PL ORG PL
PREVIOUS RECORDINGS
DVR
ORG
1
2
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
CH12 XP
Insert a disc.
1
2
5
3
6
1
DVD Menu may appear automatically. Otherwise
press TOP MENU to call up the DVD Menu.
APR/01/06
12:15PM
MAY/01/06
12:15PM
JUN/04/06
10:00AM
4
D
V
D
M
E
N
U
JUN/15/06
11:05AM
JUL/05/06
11:40PM
JUL/18/06
10:00AM
1 CH 10 XP
2 CH 10 XP
3 CH 8
4 CH 8
5 CH 8
LP
LP
EP
Press MENU / LIST to switch Original List / Playlist
if necessary.
• To exit the Title List, press TOP MENU.
Using
ENTER.
/
/
/
,select a desired title,then press
3
Press STOP C if you want to exit from the menu.
Using ,select a desired title.Press PLAY B or
Title List Menu will appear.
Example: DVR
/
2
3
ENTER. Playback will start.
DVR DVD DVD
PL ORG PL
PREVIOUS RECORDINGS
DVR
ORG
1
2
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
CH12 XP
Press STOP C to stop playback.
1
4
3
6
Play From Start
Resume Play
Protect
APR/01/06
12:15PM
JUN/04/06
10:00AM
Delete
Edit
Dubbing
Note
Search
JUN/15/06
11:05AM
JUL/18/06
10:00AM
1140PM
• Operation may vary depending on the discs.
• Use
/
/
/
to move among the titles one by
one,and use FWD D / REV E to jump to the
next / previousTitle List Page.
Using
/
,select “Play From Start” if you want
4
5
to play the title from the beginning .
Select “Resume Play” (DVR only) if you want to
play the title from the point where it is stopped last
time.
Press ENTER.
Playback will start.
Press STOP C to stop the playback.
69
Playback
Basic Playback (Cont’d)
Playback from the Disc Menu
DVD-V
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
POWER
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
Some DVD discs contain disc menus that describe the
contents or allows you to customize the playback. For
example,the menu may offer choices for subtitle lan-
guages,special features,or chapter selection.
Some discs display them automatically when you
insert the disc. For others,follow the steps below.
Press DVD first.
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
CHANNEL
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
SPACE
0
Press MENU / LIST.
PROGRAM
1
SETUP
AUDIO
CLEAR
RECORDINGS
The Disc Menu will appear.
If the feature is not available,
TV screen.
may appear on the
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
Using
to confirm.
/
/
/
,select an item. Press ENTER
2
ENTER
DISPLAY
RETURN
Continue this step to setup all the features you
want or to start playing back the disc from the
menu.
VARIABLE VARIABLE
REPLAY
SKIP
SKIP
REV
PLAY
FWD
MENU / LIST:
Displays a DVD disc menu. It may be the same with theTitle
List.
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
DVD
Cursor
/
/
/
:
VCR
DVR
REC MONITOR
Moves the cursor on the screen.
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
ENTER:
Selects the currently highlighted menu option.
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
Number Buttons:
Selects a numbered menu option (some discs only). You may
have to press ENTER after.
Press MENU / LIST to exit the Disc Menu.
3
Note
• Menus vary among discs. Refer to the information
accompanying the disc for details.
70
Playback
Basic Playback (Cont’d)
Playing back MP3 /WMA Discs
MP3
WMA
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
POWER
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
Press DVD first.
The MP3 /WMA Menu will appear automatically
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
1
when you insert a disc.Or in stop mode,press
TOP MENU to call up the MP3 /WMA List.
CHANNEL
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
FILE LIST
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
1/2
DISC NAME
SPACE
0
FOLDER NAME 1
FOLDER NAME 2
FOLDER NAME 3
FOLDER NAME 4
FOLDER NAME 5
FOLDER NAME 6
1 FILE NAME 1
PROGRAM
SETUP
AUDIO
CLEAR
RECORDINGS
2 FILE NAME 2
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
• To exit the menu, pressTOP MENU again.
ENTER
DISPLAY
RETURN
Press
/
to select a desired folder (group) or
2
track. Press ENTER.
VARIABLE VARIABLE
REPLAY
SKIP
SKIP
When a track is selected:
Playback will start.
REV
PLAY
FWD
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
DVD
When a folder is selected:
The files and the folders will appear.
VCR
DVR
REC MONITOR
Press
/
to select a track or a folder you want,then
press ENTER.
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
• Press ENTER or FWD g to move to the lower lev-
el folders.
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
• Press REV E or RETURN
to move back to the
upper level folders.
Hints for MP3 /WMA files:
• Folders are known as Groups,files are known asTracks.
• Folders are accompanied by
icon.
• The system can recognize up to 999 groups (or folders)
per disc,and up to 999 tracks per disc.
• The maximum displayable number of letters for the
group or the track name varies depending on their
names.Unrecognizable characters will be replaced with
asterisks (*).
• If there are not any playable files in the folder,the folder
will not be displayed in the list.
This unit recommends the files recorded under the follow-
ing circumstances:
• Sampling frequency:44.1kHz or 48kHz.
• Constant bit rate:112kbps – 320kbps.
Note
• The audio source of MP3 / WMA files cannot be
recorded as digital sound by an MD or DAT deck.
• Files that bear an extension other than .mp3 or .wma
(MP3 / WMA) will not appear in the MP3 / WMA
Menu.
• Some unplayable folders or tracks may appear in the
MP3 / WMA Menu depending on their recording
status.
71
Playback
Special Playback
Resume Playback
VR
DVD-RW
Video
DVD-RW
DVD-R
DVD-V
DVR
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
POWER
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
CD
MP3
WMA
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
You can resume playback from where you stopped last time.
CHANNEL
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
If you are playing the DVR,press DVR first.
If you are playing a disc,press DVD first.
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
During playback,press STOP C.
SPACE
0
1
Pressing STOP C twice will cancel the Resume
function.
PROGRAM
SETUP
AUDIO
CLEAR
RECORDINGS
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
Press PLAY B.
2
Within a few seconds, playback will resume from the
point at which it stopped last. Resume function
stays in effect even if you turn off the power.
ENTER
DISPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE VARIABLE
For DVR: You can set a resume point per every title.
• If you play back from theTitle List Menu,you can choose
“Play From Start” or “Resume Play”.Otherwise
the playback will start from the resume point of the last
played title.
• Press STOP C twice at step 1 if you do not want to
set a resume point. In this case, next time you press
PLAY B, the playback will start from the beginning
of the last title in the Title List.
REPLAY
SKIP
SKIP
REV
PLAY
FWD
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
DVD
VCR
DVR
REC MONITOR
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
For DVDs:You can set only one resume point per
disc.
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
• If a resume point is set, the playback will start from
the resume point next time you press PLAY B.
• Press STOP C twice at step 1 if you do not want to
set a resume point. In this case, next time you press
PLAY B, the playback will start from the beginning
of the first title in the Title List.
For CD, or MP3/WMA:You can set only one
resume point per disc.
• If a resume point is set, the playback will start from
the resume point next time you press PLAY B if
you are playing a CD.As to the MP3/WMA files, the
resume playback will start from the beginning of the
track last played.
• Press STOP C twice at step 1 if you do not want to
set a resume point. In this case, next time you press
PLAY B, the playback will start from the beginning
of the disc.
Note
• Resume point will be lost when you;
-Open/Close the disc tray.
-Switch Original List and Playlist.
72
Playback
Special Playback (Cont’d)
Fast forward / Fast reverse
VR
DVD-RW
Video
DVD-RW
DVD-R
DVD-V
DVR
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
POWER
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
CD
MP3
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
If you are playing the DVR,press DVR first.
If you are playing a disc,press DVD first.
CHANNEL
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
During playback,press FWD D or REV E.
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
1
Every time you press FWD D or REV E,
SPACE
0
approximate speed will change as follows.
PROGRAM
SETUP
AUDIO
CLEAR
RECORDINGS
press button
-3
-2
-1
0
+1
+2
+3
: +1
: -1
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
speed
(DVR/DVD)
Normal
speed
x40
-
x20
-
x1
x1.5
x8
x20
-
x40
-
speed
(CD)
Normal
speed
ENTER
x8
DISPLAY
RETURN
speed
(MP3)
Normal
speed
-
-
x16
x16
-
-
VARIABLE VARIABLE
OSD
REPLAY
SKIP
SKIP
indication
REV
PLAY
FWD
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
DVD
For DVR / DVD discs :
Sound will be output only during x1.5 fast forward if
you set “Fast Forward with Audio” to “On” in
the Setup Menu, otherwise the sound will be muted.
VCR
DVR
REC MONITOR
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
For Audio CDs :
approximate speed is fixed at x8 with sound.
For MP3 files :
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
approximate speed is fixed at x16.
• To return to the normal playback, press PLAY B.
• Fast forward or fast reverse playback across titles
(for DVD discs) or tracks (for MP3) is not
possible.
• Fast forward or fast reverse is not available for
WMA files.
73
Playback
Special Playback (Cont’d)
Slow forward / Slow reverse
Playback
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
VR
DVD-RW
Video
DVD-RW
POWER
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
DVD-R
DVD-V
DVR
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
If you are playing the DVR,press DVR first.
If you are playing a disc,press DVD first.
CHANNEL
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
During playback,press PAUSE k.
1
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
Press FWD D or REV E.
2
SPACE
0
Every time you press FWD D or REV E,
PROGRAM
approximate speed will change as follows.
SETUP
AUDIO
CLEAR
RECORDINGS
The sound will remain muted.
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
press button
-3
-2
-1
0
+1
+2
+3
: +1
: -1
ENTER
speed
(DVR/DVD)
Normal
speed
x1/4
x1/8
x1/16
x1/16
x1/8
x1/2
DISPLAY
RETURN
OSD
indication
VARIABLE VARIABLE
REPLAY
SKIP
SKIP
REV
PLAY
FWD
• To return to the normal playback,press PLAY B.
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
DVD
VCR
DVR
REC MONITOR
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
74
Playback
Special Playback (Cont’d)
Time Shift Playback
DVR
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
POWER
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
You can playback a title being recorded from the beginning
while recording continues.
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
CHANNEL
Press DVR first.
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
Press PLAY B during recording.
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
1
Playback of the title you are recording will start
from the beginning.
SPACE
0
• Elapsed playback time will be displayed in the Front
Panel Display.
PROGRAM
SETUP
AUDIO
CLEAR
RECORDINGS
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
To stop the playback,press STOP C ONCE.
2
• The Front Panel Display will switch back to show
the elapsed recording time.
ENTER
IMPORTANT: If you press STOP C twice, it will
DISPLAY
RETURN
stop the recording.
VARIABLE VARIABLE
REPLAY
SKIP
SKIP
REV
PLAY
FWD
Simultaneous Playback and
Recording
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
DVD
VR
DVD-RW
Video
DVD-RW
VCR
DVR
REC MONITOR
DVD-R
DVD-V
DVR
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
VCR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
You can play back a title on one device while making a
recording on other device.
To do so,simply select the device you like to use for the
playback by pressing the device select button (DVR,DVD,or
VCR) during recording,then follow the normal
procedure of playback.
Only in regard to the DVR,you can playback a title in the
same device (DVR).
To do so,pressTOP MENU during recording and select a
title you like to play,and then press PLAY B.
To playback a title being recorded while continuing to
record,refer to‘Time Shift Playback’ on this page.
75
Playback
Special Playback (Cont’d)
Pause
VR
DVD-RW
Video
DVD-RW
DVD-R
DVD-V
DVR
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
POWER
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
CD
MP3
WMA
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
If you are playing the DVR,press DVR first.
If you are playing a disc,press DVD first.
CHANNEL
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
During playback,press PAUSE F.
1
Playback will pause and sound will be muted.
SPACE
0
PROGRAM
SETUP
AUDIO
CLEAR
RECORDINGS
F
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
Press PLAY B to resume play.
2
ENTER
Step-by-Step Playback
DISPLAY
RETURN
VR
DVD-RW
Video
DVD-RW
DVD-R
DVD-V
DVR
VARIABLE VARIABLE
REPLAY
SKIP
SKIP
REV
PLAY
FWD
During playback,press PAUSE F.
1
Playback will pause and the sound will be muted.
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
DVD
VCR
DVR
REC MONITOR
F
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
Press SKIP H or G repeatedly.
2
3
Every time you press SKIP H or G, the playback
will go backward or forward one frame at a time.
Press PLAY B to resume normal playback.
Variable Replay /Variable Skip
VR
DVD-RW
Video
DVD-RW
DVD-R
DVD-V
DVR
During playback,you can skip forward or backward by
the amount of time you set in the Setup Menu with
just one touch.
To set the time amount,refer to‘6. Variable Replay /
Skip Speed’ on page 116.
If you are playing the DVR,press DVR first.
If you are playing a disc,press DVD first.
Press VARIABLE SKIP
Press VARIABLE REPLAY
backward.
if you want to skip forward.
if you want to skip
76
Playback
Special Playback (Cont’d)
Zoom
VR
DVD-RW
Video
DVD-RW
DVD-R
DVD-V
DVR
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
POWER
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
If you are playing the DVR,press DVR first.
If you are playing a disc,press DVD first.
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
CHANNEL
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
During playback,press DISPLAY twice.
1
Icons for the available features will appear.
Example: DVD-Video
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
SPACE
0
DVD MODE
T
1 / 1
C
1 / 1 0:00:04/ 1:30:00
PROGRAM
?
NR
SETUP
AUDIO
CLEAR
RECORDINGS
SEARCH
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
ENTER
DISPLAY
RETURN
Using
/
,select
icon. Press ENTER.
VARIABLE VARIABLE
2
3
4
REPLAY
SKIP
SKIP
Option window will appear.
REV
PLAY
FWD
DVD MODE
T
1 / 1
C
1 / 1 0:00:04/ 1:30:00
?
NR
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
DVD
1.
1.
2.
2
5
0
VCR
DVR
REC MONITOR
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
There are four options (x1.0, x1.2, x1.5 and x2.0),
which will be displayed excluding the current zoom
rate.
Using
Press ENTER.
/
,select a desired zoom factor to zoom.
The zoom box will be displayed.
• If you want to go back to the previous screen and
reselect the the zoom factor, press RETURN
.
Note
Using
/
/
/
,move the zoom box to the area
• When selecting a smaller factor than the current
one, the zoom box will not be displayed.
• To cancel the zoom, select “x1.0” using
you want to zoom.Press ENTER.
The selected area is zoomed.
/
, then
press ENTER.
77
Playback
Special Playback (Cont’d)
Repeat Playback
VR
DVD-RW
Video
DVD-RW
DVD-R
DVD-V
DVR
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
POWER
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
CD
MP3
WMA
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
If you are playing the DVR,press DVR first.
If you are playing a disc,press DVD first.
CHANNEL
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
During playback,press DISPLAY twice.
1
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
Icons for the available features will appear.
Example:VR mode DVD-RW disc
SPACE
0
DVD MODE
T
1 / 1
C
1 / 1 0:00:04/ 1:30:00
PROGRAM
SETUP
AUDIO
CLEAR
RECORDINGS
?
NR
SEARCH
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
ENTER
Using
/
,select
icon. Press ENTER.
2
3
DISPLAY
RETURN
Option window will appear.
VARIABLE VARIABLE
DVD MODE
T
1 / 1
C
1 / 1 0:00:04/ 1:30:00
REPLAY
SKIP
SKIP
?
NR
REV
PLAY
FWD
Off
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
DVD
Program
Chapter
Disc
VCR
DVR
REC MONITOR
A
-
B
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
Using
back. Press ENTER.
/
,select a desired option for repeat play-
The selected repeat playback will start.
Program:(DVR/DVD only) (Not available duringTime
Shift Playback)
The current title will be played back repeatedly.
Chapter:(DVR/DVD only) (Not available duringTime
Shift Playback)
The current chapter will be played back repeatedly.
Disc:(CD,MP3 /WMA,VR mode DVD-RW disc only)
The current disc will be played back repeatedly.
A-B:(DVR/DVD/CD only)
The part between the pointA and B will be played
back repeatedly.
1.Using
/
,select “A-B”,then press ENTER.
2.Play back the title up to the point where you want
to set point “A”.Then,press ENTER.
3.Play back the title up to the point where you want
to set point “B”.Then,press ENTER.
Note
• The A-B Repeat playback can only be set within the
current title (for DVDs), or current track (for Audio
CDs).
TheA-B Repeat Setting is now activated.
• To cancel the repeat playback, select “Off” at step 3.
The Repeat Setting will be also cleared when you
stop playback.
• Group Repeat is not available during the Random
Playback.
Track:(CD,MP3 /WMA only)
The current track will be played back repeatedly.
Group:(MP3 /WMA only)
The current group will be played back repeatedly.
78
Playback
Special Playback (Cont’d)
Random Playback
CD
MP3
WMA
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
POWER
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
You can play back a disc randomly instead of playing back in
the original order.
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
CHANNEL
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
Press SETUP.
1
“Easy Setting Menu” or “Advanced Menu” will appear.
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
Advanced Menu
DVD Recording Format
DVD Menu
DVR Menu
SPACE
0
PROGRAM
Initial Setup
Timer Program
CD
SETUP
AUDIO
CLEAR
RECORDINGS
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
Easy Setting Menu
ENTER
DISPLAY
RETURN
Using
/
,select “CD”. Press ENTER.
2
3
Example: CD
VARIABLE VARIABLE
REPLAY
SKIP
SKIP
Advanced Menu
DVD Menu
DVR Menu
Random Play
Program Play
REV
PLAY
FWD
Initial Setup
Timer Program
CD
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
DVD
VCR
DVR
REC MONITOR
Easy Setting Menu
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
Using
/
,select “Random Play”.
Press ENTER.
Random Playback will start.
Note
• To cancel Random Playback, press STOP C twice
during Random Playback.
79
Playback
Special Playback (Cont’d)
Program Playback
CD
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
POWER
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
You can program a playback sequence in your desired order.
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
Press SETUP.
1
“Easy Setting Menu” or “Advanced Menu” will appear.
CHANNEL
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
Advanced Menu
DVD Recording Format
DVD Menu
DVR Menu
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
SPACE
0
Initial Setup
Timer Program
CD
PROGRAM
SETUP
AUDIO
CLEAR
RECORDINGS
Easy Setting Menu
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
Using
/
,select “CD”. Press ENTER.
2
3
ENTER
Advanced Menu
DISPLAY
RETURN
DVD Menu
DVR Menu
Random Play
Program Play
VARIABLE VARIABLE
REPLAY
SKIP
SKIP
Initial Setup
Timer Program
CD
REV
PLAY
FWD
Easy Setting Menu
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
DVD
VCR
DVR
REC MONITOR
Using
Press ENTER.
/
select “Program Play”.
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
Program Play Screen will appear.
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
PROGRAM PLAY
Total
8
0:00:00
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
10
20
30
40
50
11
21
31
41
12
22
32
42
13
23
33
43
14
24
34
44
15
25
35
45
16
26
36
46
17
27
37
47
18
28
38
48
19
29
39
49
Using
/
or the Number Buttons,enter a
4
5
desired track. Press ENTER or
.
A cursor will move to the next.
PROGRAM PLAY
Total
8
0:06:11
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
10
20
30
40
50
0 9
11
21
31
41
12
22
32
42
13
23
33
43
14
24
34
44
15
25
35
45
16
26
36
46
17
27
37
47
18
28
38
48
19
29
39
49
Note
• To erase tracks you entered, select the track and
then press CLEAR.
• You can make up to 50 program settings.
• To cancel Program Playback, press STOP C twice
during Program Playback.
Press PLAY B to start Program Playback.
Program Playback will start.
• The program will remain memorized unless you open
/ close the disc tray or turn off the power.
• When you enter a single digit number using
the Number Buttons, press the number directly
without pressing 0 first.
80
Playback
Search
Title / Chapter Search
VR
DVD-RW
Video
DVD-RW
DVD-R
DVD-V
DVR
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
POWER
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
If you are playing the DVR,press DVR first.
If you are playing a disc,press DVD first.
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
CHANNEL
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
Using SKIP H /
G
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
During playback,press SKIP G to skip to the next
title or chapter.
1
SPACE
0
Press SKIP H once to skip back to the beginning
PROGRAM
SETUP
AUDIO
CLEAR
RECORDINGS
of the current title or chapter. Press SKIP
H
twice to skip back to the previous title or chapter.
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
Using DISPLAY
ENTER
DISPLAY
RETURN
During playback,press DISPLAY twice.
1
2
Icons for the available features will appear.
VARIABLE VARIABLE
REPLAY
SKIP
SKIP
?
Using
/
,select
icon. Press ENTER.
REV
PLAY
FWD
T
The title number next to
will be highlighted.
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
DVD
DVD MODE
T
1 / 1
C
1 / 1 0:00:04/ 1:30:00
VCR
DVR
?
NR
REC MONITOR
SEARCH
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
Title:
Using
/
or the Number Buttons,enter a desired
title number to search. Then,press ENTER.
Title Search will start.
Chapter:
C
Using ,move to the number next to
for chapter.
Using or the Number Buttons,enter a desired
/
chapter number to search. Then,press ENTER.
Chapter Search will start.
.
Note
• In Search Mode Display, total numbers of each search
contents (title / chapter / time) are shown as a
denominator.
DVD MODE
T
1 / 1
C
1 / 1 0:00:04/ 1:30:00
?
NR
SEARCH
Current title number /
Total number of titles
Elapsed time of the
current title /
Total time of the
current title
Current chapter number /
Total number of chapters
81
Playback
Search (Cont’d)
Track Search
CD
MP3
WMA
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
POWER
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
Press DVD first.
Using SKIP H /
G
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
CHANNEL
During playback,press SKIP i to skip to the
next track.
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
1
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
Press SKIP j once to skip back to the beginning
of the current track.
SPACE
0
Press SKIP j twice to skip back to the previous
track.
PROGRAM
SETUP
AUDIO
CLEAR
RECORDINGS
Using DISPLAY
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
During playback,press DISPLAY twice.
1
2
Icons for the available features will appear.
ENTER
?
Using
/
,select
icon. Press ENTER.
DISPLAY
RETURN
T
The track number next to
Example: CD
will be highlighted.
VARIABLE VARIABLE
REPLAY
SKIP
SKIP
DVD MODE
T
1 / 13
0:00:04/ 1:30:00
REV
PLAY
FWD
?
SEARCH
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
DVD
VCR
DVR
REC MONITOR
Using
/
or the Number Buttons,enter a
3
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
desired track number to search.Press ENTER.
Track Search will start.
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
82
Playback
Search (Cont’d)
Time Search
VR
DVD-RW
Video
DVD-RW
DVD-R
DVD-V
DVR
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
POWER
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
CD
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
If you are playing the DVR,press DVR first.
If you are playing a disc,press DVD first.
CHANNEL
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
During playback,press DISPLAY twice.
1
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
Icons for the available features will appear.
SPACE
0
?
Using
/
,select
icon. Press ENTER.
2
3
PROGRAM
SETUP
AUDIO
CLEAR
RECORDINGS
The number next to
Example: DVD
T
will be highlighted.
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
DVD MODE
T
1 / 1
C
1 / 1 0:00:04/ 1:30:00
?
NR
ENTER
SEARCH
DISPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE VARIABLE
REPLAY
SKIP
SKIP
Move the cursor to the elapsed time counter using
.
REV
PLAY
FWD
When Time Search is not available, “--:--:-- / --:--:--”
(“0:00:00 / 0:00:00” for CD) is displayed instead
of time count.
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
DVD
VCR
DVR
REC MONITOR
Elapsed time counter
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DVD MODE
T
1 / 1
C
1 / 1 0:00:04/ 1:30:00
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
?
NR
SEARCH
Using
/
or the Number Buttons,enter a
4
desired time to search. Press ENTER.
Time Search will start.
Note
• Time Search is available only within the same track
or title.
83
Playback
Search (Cont’d)
Series Search
DVR
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
POWER
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
You can search for the group of titles made with the same
PeriodicalTimer Recordings.We refer to such a group of titles
as“series”.This feature is available only with the DVR.
Press DVR first.
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
CHANNEL
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
Press TOP MENU.
Title List will appear.
1
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
DVR DVD DVD
PL ORG PL
PREVIOUS RECORDINGS
DVR
ORG
SPACE
0
1
2
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
CH12 XP
1
2
5
3
6
PROGRAM
SETUP
AUDIO
CLEAR
RECORDINGS
APR/01/06
12:15PM
MAY/01/06
12:15PM
JUN/04/06
10:00AM
4
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
JUN/15/06
11:05AM
JUL/05/06
11:40PM
JUL/18/06
10:00AM
ENTER
Press MENU / LIST to switch Original List / Playlist
if necessary.
DISPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE VARIABLE
REPLAY
SKIP
SKIP
Using
/
,select any title that belongs to the
2
3
series you want to search and press ENTER.
Title List Menu will appear.
REV
PLAY
FWD
Play From Start
Resume Play
Protect
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
DVD
VCR
DVR
REC MONITOR
Delete
Edit
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
Dubbing
Search
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
Using
Series List will appear.
/
, select “Search”.Press ENTER.
Select Series
001 Mon 10:00AM CH 8
002 Moon-Sunn 10:000AM CH 8
No Series
1/1
Highlight will be on the series that contains the
selected title.
84
Playback
Search (Cont’d)
Using
ENTER.
/
,select the desired series.Press
4
5
Title List of the selected series will appear.
DVR DVD DVD
PL ORG PL
PREVIOUS RECORDINGS
DVR
ORG
1
2
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
CH12 XP
6
8
9
JUL/18/06
10:00AM
JUL/25/06
10:00AM
AUG/01/06
10:00AM
12
16
20
AUG/08/06
10:00AM
AUG/15/06
10:00AM
AUG/22/06
10:00AM
Using
/
/
/
,select a desired title to play,
then press PLAY B.Or press ENTER to call up the
Title List Menu and select your desired playback style.
To show the regularTitle List,select “DisplayAll
Program” from theTitle List Menu.Then press
ENTER.
1
Select Series
001 Mon 10:00AM CH 8
2
002 Mon-Sun 10:00AM CH 8
No Series
3
1/1
4
1
2
Series List
• Up to 8 series can be displayed on 1 page.
• The series that contains the oldest title comes first on
the list.
Information on the series.
• Type of the Periodical Recording (ex.every Monday),
start time,and the recording channel.(In the example
here,the information tells you this series is recorded
on every Monday,starting at 10:00AM on channel 8.)
No Series
• All recordings which are not periodical fall into this
category.
• “No Series” will always be at the last on the list.
Current page /Total number of pages.
• Up to 38 pages (300 series) are available.
3
4
Note
• The unit exits the Series Search mode when you
switch the list type or the device mode.
85
Playback
Selecting a Format ofAudio andVideo
Switching Subtitles
VR
DVD-V
DVD-RW
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
POWER
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
Many DVD-Video discs have subtitles in one or more lan-
guages. Available languages are usually written on their
packages.You can switch subtitle languages anytime during
playback. Available language vary among discs.
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
CHANNEL
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
Press DVD first.
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
During playback,press DISPLAY twice.
SPACE
0
1
Icons for the available features will appear.
PROGRAM
SETUP
AUDIO
CLEAR
RECORDINGS
DVD MODE
T
1 / 1
C
1 / 1 0:00:04/ 1:30:00
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
?
NR
SEARCH
ENTER
DISPLAY
RETURN
Using
/
,select
icon. Press ENTER.
2
Subtitle Menu will appear.
VARIABLE VARIABLE
REPLAY
SKIP
SKIP
DVD MODE
T
1 / 1
C
1 / 1 0:00:04/ 1:30:00
REV
PLAY
FWD
?
NR
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
DVD
Off
VCR
DVR
REC MONITOR
1.English
2.Japanese
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
• If you are playing aVR mode DVD-RW disc, “Off”
or “On” will be the only option.
Using
Press ENTER.
/
,select a desired subtitle language.
3
Subtitles will be displayed in the selected language.
When selecting “Off”, subtitles will disappear.
Note
• Some discs will only allow you to change subtitles
from the Disc Menu. Press MENU / LIST to display
the Disc Menu.
• If a 4-digit language code appears in the Subtitle
Menu at step 2, refer to ‘Language Code’ on page
135.
86
Playback
Selecting a Format ofAudio andVideo (Cont’d)
SwitchingAudio Soundtrack
VR
DVD-V
DVR
DVD-RW
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
POWER
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
When playing back a title recorded with two or more soundtracks
(these are often in different languages),you can switch between
them during playback.
When playing backAudio CDs or MP3 /WMA files,you can switch
among stereo,the left channel only and the right channel only.
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
CHANNEL
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
If you are playing the DVR,press DVR first.
If you are playing a disc,press DVD first.
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
SPACE
0
During playback,press AUDIO to call up the available
audio settings on theTV screen (see examples below).
1
PROGRAM
SETUP
AUDIO
CLEAR
RECORDINGS
Example: DVD-Video
DVD MODE
T
1 / 1
C
1 / 1 0:00:04/ 1:30:00
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
?
NR
1.Dolby Digital 2ch English
2.Dolby Digital 5.1ch English
3.Dolby Digital 2ch English
ENTER
DISPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE VARIABLE
Example: CD/ MP3/WMA
REPLAY
SKIP
SKIP
DVD MODE
T
1 / 1
0:00:04/ 1:30:00
REV
PLAY
FWD
?
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
DVD
L / R
L
VCR
DVR
R
REC MONITOR
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
Using
/
,select the desired setting,then press
2
ENTER to activate the setting.
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
As in the example below, if the title contains both main
and sub audio, you can further select “L” (main),
“R” (sub), or “L/R” ( mixed of main and sub).
Example:VR mode DVD-RW disc
DVD MODE
T
1 / 1
C
1 / 1 0:00:04/ 1:30:00
?
NR
1.Dolby Digital DUAL L
Press ENTER.
DVD MODE
T
1 / 1
C
1 / 1 0:00:04/ 1:30:00
?
NR
Note
L / R
L
• Some discs will only allow you to change the
soundtrack from the Disc Menu. Press TOP MENU
to display the Disc Menu.
R
Using
/
, select the desired setting, then press
ENTER to activate the setting.
• Although this unit cannot record both Stereo (main)
and SAP(sub) at the same time, someVR mode DVD-
RW discs may contain both audio.With such discs,
you can select either Main (L), Sub(R) or both (L+R)
as your playback audio.
DISPLAY button can also lead you to the AUDIO
Menu.Simply press DISPLAY twice during playback
to show the icons for the available features,then using
3
/
,select
and press ENTER.
87
Playback
Selecting a Format ofAudio andVideo (Cont’d)
Switching CameraAngles
Visual Noise Reduction
VR Video
DVD-R
DVD-V
DVR
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
DVD-V
Some DVD-Videos contain the scenes shot from multiple
angles.In those scenes you can change the camera angles by
following the steps below.Changing angles is available only
where scenes are shot from different angles.
This feature allows you to reduce visual noise during playback.
If you are playing the DVR,press DVR first.
If you are playing a disc,press DVD first.
During playback,press DISPLAY twice.
1
Press DVD first.
Icons for the available features will appear.
Example: DVD-Video
During playback,press DISPLAY twice.
1
Icons for the available features will appear.
DVD MODE
T
1 / 1
C
1 / 1 0:00:04/ 1:30:00
DVD MODE
T
1 / 1
C
1 / 1 0:00:04/ 1:30:00
?
NR
SEARCH
?
NR
SEARCH
.
NR
Using
/
,select
icon. Press ENTER.
If you set the Angle Icon Setting to “On” in the
Setup Menu (see page 117), an angle icon will appear
at the bottom right corner of the TV screen in
scenes where different camera angles are available.
2
Option window will appear.
DVD MODE
T
1 / 1
C
1 / 1 0:00:04/ 1:30:00
?
NR
Using
/
,select
icon. Press ENTER.
2
Angle will change each time you press ENTER.
Off
Type1
Type2
Note
•
will appear when Angle feature is not available.
Off: When playing back titles with a few
noises such as DVD-Video discs.
Type 1: For the titles recorded in long time
mode such as SLP or SEP mode.
Type 2: Same as type 1, only more effective.
Using
/
,select a desired option. Press ENTER.
3
Your setting is now activated.
88
Editing
Information on Disc Editing
Guide to theTitle List
When you record programs to the DVR / DVD, a title list will be created.Title list is the thumbnails of the recorded programs (titles).
You can call up theTitle List by pressing TOP MENU and select the title of your choice from the list and can play or edit it from the
Title List Menu.
1
Selected device (DVR or DVD) and selected list type
(Original List or Playlist)
The number of the currentTitle List page / the total number of theTitle
List pages
1
2
4
DVR DVD DVD
PL ORG PL
PREVIOUS RECORDINGS
DVR
ORG
1
2
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
CH12 XP
3
5
2
1
2
5
3
Use FWD D to jump to the next page.Use REV E to jump to
APR/01/06
12:15PM
MAY/01/06
12:15PM
JUN/04/06
10:00AM
the previous page. Use
/
to move among titles one by one.
4
6
6
3
4
Title name,recorded channel and Rec Mode (if the title name has not
been assigned yet,the date and the time the recording was made,the
recorded channel (Original ListTitles in the DVR orVR mode DVD-
RW only), the Rec Mode (Original List only) will be assigned as the title
name automatically)
JUN/15/06
11:05AM
JUL/05/06
11:40PM
JUL/18/06
10:00AM
Thumbnails of the titles
SCENE DELETING
DVR
ORG
Only the highlighted thumbnail can be seen in motion.
Date and time the title was recorded.
Protected icon
This icon appears only when the title is protected (Original List only).
Status bar
Preview window
Progress bar
0:00:00
5
6
7
8
7
8
9
9
10
Start Point
Return
10 Command bar
What are Original List and Playlist?
There are 2 types for the title list:Original List and Playlist.
Original List:
Original List is the list of the recorded programs (titles) which are created automatically when they are recorded.Original List is avail-
able for DVR,DVD-RW,and DVD-R.Please note that editing the titles in the Original List is like editing the original data.For example,if
you erase a title in the Original List,the title cannot be recovered.So, please be careful when you work in the Original List.
Playlist:
Playlist is the copy of the Original List.You can edit the titles in the Playlist as you like without affecting the Original data in the
Original List.It works like a back up for the Playlist.Deleting a title from the Playlist does not delete the corresponding title in the
Original List,but deleting a title from the Original List also deletes the corresponding title in the Playlist.With DVR andVR mode
DVD-RW,the Playlist is created automatically.Playlist is available only for the DVR and theVR mode DVDs.There is no Playlist
for theVideo mode DVDs.
Available Menus (o =Available,x = NotAvailable)
Media
Item
DVR
Video Mode DVDs VR mode DVDs
Page
Description
Original Playlist
Original
Original Playlist
Play from Start
Resume Play
Protect/Undo Protect
Delete
Edit
Dubbing
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
x
o
o
o
o
x
x
o
o
x
o
x
o
o
o
x
o
x
x
o
o
x
69 To play from the beginning of the title.
72 To resume playback from the point where it is stopped last time.
93 To protect/undo protect the title.
90-91 To delete a title.
-
48 To make copies.
To search for the group of titles made with the same
PeriodicalTimer Recordings.
Search
o
o
x
x
x
84-85
Protect/Undo Protect
Delete
EditTitle Name
Scene Delete
Divide
Combine
Move
Chapter Marker
AddTo Playlist
o
o
o
o
x
x
x
o
o
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
x
o
o
x
x
x
x
x
x
o
o
o
o
x
x
x
o
o
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
93 To protect/undo protect the title.
90-91 To delete a title.
94-95
96-97 To delete a part of the title.
98-99 To divide a title into two titles.
100-101 To combine two titles into one.
102-103 To rearrange the order of theTitle List.
104-107 To add/delete the chapter marks.
108-109 To add a title to the Playlist.
89
Editing
DeletingTitles
Deleting SelectedTitles
VR
DVD-RW
Video
DVD-RW
DVD-R
DVR
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
POWER
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
[VIDEO] [VR] [ORIGINAL] [PLAYLIST]
You can delete titles which you do not need anymore.
Be advised that the titles once deleted cannot be recovered.
With DVD-R discs, deleting titles will not affect the
recordable disc space.
WithVideo mode DVD-RW discs, the disc space will
increase only when the last title in the Original List is
deleted.
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
CHANNEL
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
WithVR mode DVD-RW discs, the disc space will
increase when any title in the Original List is deleted.
Deleting a title in the Playlist will not delete the
corresponding title in the Original List.
SPACE
0
PROGRAM
SETUP
AUDIO
CLEAR
RECORDINGS
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
If you are playing the DVR, press DVR first.
If you are playing a disc, press DVD first.
ENTER
Press TOP MENU.
Title List will appear.
1
DISPLAY
RETURN
Example: DVR Original List
VARIABLE VARIABLE
REPLAY
SKIP
SKIP
DVR DVD DVD
PREVIOUS RECORDINGS
DVR
ORG
PL ORG PL
1
2
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
CH12 XP
REV
PLAY
FWD
1
2
5
3
6
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
DVD
APR/01/06
12:15PM
MAY/01/06
12:15PM
JUN/04/06
10:00AM
4
VCR
DVR
REC MONITOR
JUN/15/06
11:05AM
JUL/05/06
11:40PM
JUL/18/06
10:00AM
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
Press MENU / LIST to switch Original List / Playlist
if necessary.
Using
Press ENTER.
Title List Menu will appear.
/
/
/
,select a desired title to delete.
2
DVR DVD DVD
PL ORG PL
PREVIOUS RECORDINGS
DVR
ORG
1
2
JUN/04 10:00AM CH12 XP
CH12 XP
1
4
2
3
6
Play From Start
Resume Play
Protect
APR/01/06
12:15PM
JUN/04/06
10:00AM
Delete
Edit
Dubbing
Search
11:40PM
JUN/15/06
11:05AM
JUL/18/06
10:00AM
90
Editing
DeletingTitles (Cont’d)
Using
/
,select “Delete”.Press ENTER.
3
4
Confirmation window will appear.
DVR DVD DVD
PL ORG PL
PREVIOUS RECORDINGS
DVR
ORG
1
2
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
CH12 XP
1
3
6
Play From Start
Resume Play
Protect
Delete thisprogram?
APR/01/06
12:15PM
JUN/04/06
10:00AM
Yes
No
4
Dubbing
Search
1140PM
JUN/15/06
11:05AM
JUL/18/06
10:00AM
Using
/
,select “Yes”.Press ENTER.
Final confirmation window will appear.
DVR DVD DVD
PL ORG PL
PREVIOUS RECORDINGS
DVR
ORG
1
2
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
CH12 XP
1
2
3
6
Play From Start
Resume Play
ote
Areyousure?
APR/01/06
12:15PM
JUN/04/06
10:00AM
No
Yes
4
Dubbing
Search
JUN/15/06
11:05AM
1140PM
JUL/18/06
10:00AM
Using / ,select “Yes”.Press ENTER.
The selected title is now deleted.
5
6
DVR DVD DVD
PL ORG PL
PREVIOUS RECORDINGS
DVR
ORG
1
2
JUN/15 11:05AM CH12 XP
CH12 XP
1
2
5
3
6
APR/01/06
12:15PM
MAY/01/06
12:15PM
JUN/15/06
11:05AM
4
JUL/05/06
11:40PM
JUL/18/06
10:00AM
JUN/20/06
11:30AM
Press TOP MENU to exit.
Note
• When a title is deleted from an Original List,
corresponding title on the Playlist(s) will be also
deleted.
• Deleting a Playlist will not increase the recordable
disc space.
91
Editing
DeletingTitles (Cont’d)
Deleting allTitles in DVR
DVR
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
POWER
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
[ORIGINAL] [PLAYLIST]
Press DVR first.
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
Press SETUP.
1
CHANNEL
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
“Easy Setting Menu” or “Advanced Menu” will appear.
Advanced Menu
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
DVD Disc Format
DVD Recording Format
Finalize
DVD Menu
DVR Menu
SPACE
0
Initial Setup
Timer Program
PROGRAM
Disc Protect
SETUP
AUDIO
CLEAR
RECORDINGS
Delete Playlist
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
Easy Setting Menu
ENTER
Using
Press ENTER.
/
,select “DVR Menu”.
2
DISPLAY
RETURN
Advanced Menu
VARIABLE VARIABLE
REPLAY
SKIP
Erase All in DVR
SKIP
DVD Menu
DVR Menu
REV
PLAY
FWD
Initial Setup
Timer Program
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
DVD
Easy Setting Menu
VCR
DVR
REC MONITOR
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
With “EraseAll in DVR” selected,press ENTER.
3
4
5
6
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
Option window will appear.
Erase All in DVR
Original All
Playlist All
Using
/
,select desired option.Press ENTER.
Confirmation window will appear.
Delete all programs?
Yes
No
Using
/
,select “Yes”.Press ENTER.
Final confirmation window will appear.
Are you sure?
Yes
No
Using
/
,select “Yes”. Press ENTER.
All titles in the selected list are erased.
92
Editing
Protecting / Undo ProtectingTitles
VR
DVD-RW
DVR
[VR] [ORIGINAL]
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
To prevent accidental editing or title erasing,you can protect
the contents in the Original List.
POWER
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
If you are playing the DVR,press DVR first.
If you are playing a disc,press DVD first.
CHANNEL
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
PressTOP MENU.
1
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
Title List will appear.
Example: DVR Original List
SPACE
0
DVR DVD DVD
PREVIOUS RECORDINGS
DVR
ORG
PL ORG PL
PROGRAM
1
2
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
CH12 XP
SETUP
AUDIO
CLEAR
RECORDINGS
1
2
5
3
6
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
APR/01/06
12:15PM
MAY/01/06
12:15PM
JUN/04/06
10:00AM
4
ENTER
JUN/15/06
11:05AM
JUL/05/06
11:40PM
JUL/18/06
10:00AM
DISPLAY
RETURN
Press MENU / LIST to switch to Original List
VARIABLE VARIABLE
REPLAY
SKIP
SKIP
if necessary.
REV
PLAY
FWD
Using
Press ENTER.
/
/
/
,select a desired title to protect.
2
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
DVD
Title List Menu will appear.
VCR
DVR
REC MONITOR
DVR DVD DVD
PL ORG PL
PREVIOUS RECORDINGS
JUN/04 10:00AM CH12 XP
DVR
ORG
1
2
CH12 XP
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
1
3
6
Play From Start
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
Resume Play
Protect
APR/01/06
12:15PM
JUN/04/06
10:00AM
Delete
4
Edit
Dubbing
Search
11:40PM
JUN/15/06
11:05AM
JUL/18/06
10:00AM
Using
/
,select “Protect”.Press ENTER.
3
4
The key icon will appear at the upper left corner of
the thumbnail.
If the title has already been protected
“Undo Protect” will be listed in the Title List
Menu instead of “Protect”.To cancel the
protection, select “Undo Protect” and press
ENTER.The key icon will disappear.
PressTOP MENU to exit.
To protect the disc itself,refer to‘Protecting a Disc’
on page 62.
93
Editing
EditingTitle Names
VR
DVD-RW
Video
DVD-RW
DVD-R
DVR
[VIDEO] [VR] [ORIGINAL] [PLAYLIST]
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
You can name titles and change the names from this menu.
The names you put on the titles will be displayed on aTitle List.
POWER
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
If you are playing the DVR,press DVR first.
If you are playing a disc,press DVD first.
CHANNEL
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
Press TOP MENU.
Title List will appear.
1
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
Example: DVR Original List
SPACE
0
DVR DVD DVD
PL ORG PL
PREVIOUS RECORDINGS
DVR
ORG
1
2
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
CH12 XP
PROGRAM
SETUP
AUDIO
CLEAR
RECORDINGS
1
2
3
6
APR/01/06
12:15PM
MAY/01/06
12:15PM
JUN/04/06
10:00AM
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
4
5
JUN/15/06
11:05AM
JUL/05/06
11:40PM
JUL/18/06
10:00AM
ENTER
DISPLAY
RETURN
Press MENU / LIST to switch Original List / Playlist
if necessary.
VARIABLE VARIABLE
REPLAY
SKIP
SKIP
REV
PLAY
FWD
Using
/
/
/
,select a desired title to edit.
2
3
Press ENTER.
Title List Menu will appear.
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
DVD
DVR DVD DVD
PL ORG PL
VCR
DVR
PREVIOUS RECORDINGS
JUN/04 10:00AM CH12 XP
REC MONITOR
DVR
ORG
1
2
CH12 XP
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
1
3
6
Play From Start
Resume Play
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
Protect
APR/01/06
12:15PM
JUN/04/06
10:00AM
Delete
4
Edit
Dubbing
Search
JUN/15/06
11:05AM
JUL/18/06
10:00AM
11:40PM
Using
Edit Menu will appear.
/
,select “Edit”,then press ENTER.
DVR DVD DVD
PL ORG PL
PROGRAM EDITING
DVR
ORG
1
2
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
CH12 XP
1
4
3
6
Protect
Delete
Edit Title Name
SceneDelete
APR/01/06
12:15PM
JUN/04/06
10:00AM
Chapter Mark
Add To Playlist
JUN/15/06
11:05AM
JUL/05/06
11:40PM
JUL/18/06
10:00AM
94
Editing
EditingTitle Names (Cont’d)
Using
ENTER.
Editing Screen will appear.
/
,select “EditTitle Name”,then press
4
DVR DVD DVD
PL ORG PL
PROGRAM EDITING
DVR
CH2 XP _
A
F
K
P
U
Z
1
!
B
G
L
Q
V
C
H
M
R
D
I
N
S
X
E
J
O
T
Y
a
f
k
p
u
z
6
&
:
b
g
l
q
v
c
h
m
r
w
d
i
n
s
x
e
j
o
t
Space
Right
Left
BS
Clear
y
W
2
"
,
3
#
-
4
$
.
5
%
/
7
'
;
8
(
<
|
9
)
=
}
0
*
>
~
+
?
[
]
^
_
{
@
Decide
Return
To enter a title name,refer to‘Guide to EditTitle
Name’ below.
5
6
When you finish entering the title name,press
PLAY B .Or using
/
/
/
,select “Decide”,
then press ENTER.
Your setting is now activated.
Press TOP MENU to exit.
7
Guide to EditTitle Name
Method 1: By selecting the letters on the screen:
Using
/
/
,move to a desired letter or a command key,then press ENTER.
/
The selected letter will be entered in the field at the top of the screen.
Method 2: By entering the letters directly using the Number Buttons:
Following the list below,press the Number Buttons repeatedly until the desired letter
appears.
ABC
Press
press
2
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
space , 0
. @ / : 1
abc
...
A B C a
ABC
DEF
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
def
Note:
GHI
ghi
Unidentified letters in a
title name are shown
by . If you delete
JKL
jkl
*
MNO
PQRS
TUV
mno
pqrs
tuv
them, adjoining letters
may change to or
*
other.
WXYZ
wxyz
• If you want to enter the same letters successively,for example if you want to enter AA,
2
press ENTER after you enter the first A (
),then enter the other A by pressing
2
(
) one more time.
• Press FWD g for a space.
• Press SKIP H / G to move the cursor to the left or right.
• Press REW h for a back space.
• Press CLEAR to erase all letters entered.
•You can enter up to 64 letters,for the titles in the DVR and the VR mode DVDs.
•You can enter up to 30 letters,for the titles in theVideo mode DVDs.
95
Editing
Deleting a Part of aTitle
VR
DVD-RW
DVR
[VR] [ORIGINAL] [PLAYLIST]
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
You can delete a specific part of a title.
POWER
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
Even if a part of a title is deleted from the Playlist,the title in
the Original List will remain as it was,and recordable disc
space will not increase.
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
CHANNEL
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
If you are playing the DVR,press DVR first.
If you are playing a disc,press DVD first.
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
Press TOP MENU.
Title List will appear.
1
SPACE
0
Example: DVR Original List
PROGRAM
SETUP
AUDIO
CLEAR
RECORDINGS
DVR DVD DVD
PL ORG PL
PREVIOUS RECORDINGS
DVR
ORG
1
2
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
CH12 XP
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
1
2
5
3
6
APR/01/06
12:15PM
MAY/01/06
12:15PM
JUN/04/06
10:00AM
ENTER
4
DISPLAY
RETURN
JUN/15/06
11:05AM
JUL/05/06
11:40PM
JUL/18/06
10:00AM
VARIABLE VARIABLE
REPLAY
SKIP
SKIP
Press MENU / LIST to switch Original List / Playlist
REV
PLAY
FWD
if necessary.
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
DVD
Using
Press ENTER.
Title List Menu will appear.
/
/
/
,select a desired title to edit.
2
3
VCR
DVR
REC MONITOR
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DVR DVD DVD
PL ORG PL
PREVIOUS RECORDINGS
JUN/04 10:00AM CH12 XP
DVR
ORG
1
2
CH12 XP
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
1
2
3
6
Play From Start
Resume Play
Protect
APR/01/06
12:15PM
JUN/04/06
10:00AM
Delete
4
Edit
Dubbing
Search
11:40PM
JUN/15/06
11:05AM
JUL/18/06
10:00AM
Using
Edit Menu will appear.
/
,select “Edit”,then press ENTER.
DVR DVD DVD
PL ORG PL
PROGRAM EDITING
DVR
ORG
1
2
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
CH12 XP
1
4
3
6
Protect
Delete
Edit Title Name
SceneDelete
APR/01/06
12:15PM
JUN/04/06
10:00AM
Chapter Mark
Add To Playlist
JUN/15/06
11:05AM
JUL/05/06
11:40PM
JUL/18/06
10:00AM
Note
• If a certain scene is deleted from the title in the
Original List, the title in the Playlist that contains
the corresponding scene will be deleted also.
•
When you search for the start/end point, you can use
SKIP H / G, FWD h / REV g,
VARIABLE REPLAY
/ VARIABLE SKIP
,
PAUSE k or PLAY B as usual.
96
Editing
Deleting a Part of aTitle (Cont’d)
Using
ENTER.
Editing Screen will appear.
/
,select “Scene Delete”,then press
When it reaches the desired end point,press
ENTER,or press PAUSE k or STOP C and then
ENTER.
An end point is marked,and the display shown below
will appear.
4
5
8
SCENE DELETING
DVR
ORG
0:00:00
SCENE DELETING
DVR
ORG
0:25:32
Start Point
Return
End Point Cancel
Return
Update
Press PLAY B to start playback.
Play the title up to the point where you want to set a
start point for the scene to be deleted.
• If you want to reset the end point, select “End
Point Cancel” with , then press ENTER.
• If you want to quit the entire process, select
“Return” with , then press ENTER.
/
SCENE DEELETING
DVR
ORG
/
0:12:45
With “Update” selected,press ENTER.
Confirmation window will appear.
9
DVR
ORG
SCENE DELETING
Start Point
Return
0:25:32
• If you want to quit the process, select “Return”
with .Then press ENTER.
Delete Selected Scene?
Yes
No
/
When it reaches the desired start point,press
ENTER,or press PAUSE k or STOP C and then
ENTER.
End Point Cancel
Return
Update
6
A start point is marked,and the display shown below
will appear.
Using
/
,select “Yes”,then press ENTER.
10
Final confirmation window will appear.
DVR
ORG
SCENE DELETING
SCENE DELETING
ORG
D
VR
0:20:38
0:25:32
Areyousure?
Yes No
Start Point Cancel
End Point
Return
End Point Ca
n
c
el
Return Update
• If you want to reset the start point, select
“Start Point Cancel” with
ENTER.
/
, then press
Using
/
,select “Yes”,then press ENTER.
11
12
The scene is now deleted.
• If you want to quit the entire process, select
“Return” with , then press ENTER.
/
If you want to delete other parts,repeat steps 5-11.
Otherwise,select “RETURN” and press ENTER.
Final confirmation window will appear.
Press PLAY B to start play back again.
Play the title up to the point where you want to set an
end point for the scene to be deleted.
7
Using
finish the editing.
/
,select “Yes”,then press ENTER to
Press TOP MENU to exit.
13
97
Editing
Dividing aTitle
VR
DVD-RW
DVR
[VR] [PLAYLIST]
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
POWER
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
You can divide a title into two new titles.
If you are playing the DVR,press DVR first.
If you are playing a disc,press DVD first.
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
CHANNEL
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
Press TOP MENU
1
Title List will appear.
Example: DVR Playlist
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
DVR
ORG
DVD DVD
ORG PL
PREVIOUS RECORDINGS
DVR
PL
SPACE
0
1
2
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
PROGRAM
1
2
3
SETUP
AUDIO
CLEAR
RECORDINGS
APR/01/06
12:15PM
MAY/01/06
12:15PM
JUN/04/06
10:00AM
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
4
5
6
JUN/15/06
11:05AM
JUL/05/06
11:40PM
JUL/18/06
10:00AM
ENTER
DISPLAY
RETURN
Press MENU / LIST to switch to Playlist
if necessary.
VARIABLE VARIABLE
REPLAY
SKIP
SKIP
Using
Press ENTER.
Title List Menu will appear.
/
/
/
,select a desired title to edit.
REV
PLAY
FWD
2
3
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
DVD
DVR
ORG
DVD DVD
ORG PL
PREVIOUS RECORDINGS
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
DVR
PL
VCR
DVR
REC MONITOR
1
2
1
2
3
Play Fromm Start
Resume Play
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
Delete
APR/01/06
12:15PM
JUN/04/06
10:00AM
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
Edit
4
6
Dubbing
Search
JUN/15/06
11:05AM
JUL/05/06
11:40PM
JUL/18/06
10:00AM
Using
/
,select “Edit”,then press ENTER.
Edit Menu will appear.
DVR
ORG
DVD DVD
ORG PL
PROGRAM EDITING
DVR
PL
1
2
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
Delete
1
4
3
Edit Title Name
Scene Delete
APR/01/06
12:15PM
JUN/04/06
10:00AM
Divide
Combine
6
Move
Chapter Mark
AddToPlaylist
JUN/15/06
11:05AM
JUL/18/06
10:00AM
98
Editing
Dividing aTitle (Cont’d)
Using
/
,select “Divide”,then press ENTER.
4
Editing Screen will appear.
PROGRAM DIVIDING
DVR
PL
0:00:00
Divide
Press PLAY B to start playback.Play the title up to
the point where you want to divide the title.
5
6
When it reaches the desired dividing point,press
ENTER,or press PAUSE k or STOP C and then
ENTER.
Confirmation window will appear.
PROGRAM DIVIDING
DVR
PL
0:45:10
Divide program here?
Yes No
Divide
Using
/
,select “Yes”,then press ENTER.
7
8
The title is now divided.
PressTOP MENU to exit.
Note
• If a disc contains the maximum number of
recordings (DVR:300, DVD-RW disc:99), you
cannot divide any titles.
• With DVD-RW disc, you cannot divide the titles if
the total number of chapters has already reached
999.
•
When you search for the dividing point, you can use
SKIP H / G, FWD h / REV g,
VARIABLE REPLAY
/VARIABLE SKIP
,
PAUSE k or PLAY B as usual.
99
Editing
CombiningTitles
VR
DVD-RW
DVR
[VR] [PLAYLIST]
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
You can combine two titles into a single title.
POWER
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
Steps on how to combine title 1 and 2 are shown here as an
example.
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
CHANNEL
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
If you are playing the DVR,press DVR first.
If you are playing a disc,press DVD first.
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
Press TOP MENU.
1
SPACE
0
Title List will appear.
Example:DVR Playlist
PROGRAM
SETUP
AUDIO
CLEAR
RECORDINGS
DVR
ORG
DVD DVD
ORG PL
PREVIOUS RECORDINGS
DVR
PL
1
2
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
1
2
5
3
APR/01/06
12:15PM
MAY/01/06
12:15PM
JUN/04/06
10:00AM
ENTER
4
6
DISPLAY
RETURN
JUN/15/06
11:05AM
JUL/05/06
11:40PM
JUL/18/06
10:00AM
VARIABLE VARIABLE
REPLAY
SKIP
SKIP
Press MENU / LIST to switch to Playlist
if necessary.
REV
PLAY
FWD
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
DVD
Using
Press ENTER.
/
/
/
,select a desired title (title 1).
2
3
VCR
DVR
REC MONITOR
Title List Menu will appear.
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DVR
ORG
DVD DVD
ORG PL
PREVIOUS RECORDINGS
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
DVR
PL
1
2
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
1
3
Play Fromm Start
Resume Play
Delete
APR/01/06
12:15PM
JUN/04/06
10:00AM
Edit
4
6
Dubbing
Search
JUN/15/06
11:05AM
JUL/05/06
11:40PM
JUL/18/06
10:00AM
Using
/
,select “Edit”,then press ENTER.
Edit Menu will appear.
DVR
ORG
DVD DVD
ORG PL
PROGRAM EDITING
DVR
PL
1
2
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
Delete
1
4
3
Edit Title Name
Scene Delete
APR/01/06
12:15PM
JUN/04/06
10:00AM
Divide
Combine
6
Move
Chapter Mark
AddToPlaylist
JUN/15/06
11:05AM
JUL/18/06
10:00AM
100
Editing
CombiningTitles (Cont’d)
Using
ENTER.
/
,select “Combine”, then press
4
5
The selected title will disappear temporarily and the
frame of the next title will be highlighted.
DVR
ORG
DVD DVD
ORG PL
PROGRAM EDITING
DVR
PL
1
2
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
2
3
6
4
MAY/01/06
12:15PM
JUN/04/06
10:00AM
JUN/15/06
11:05AM
5
7
JUL/05/06
11:40PM
JUL/18/06
10:00AM
JUN/20/06
11:30AM
Using
/
/
/
,select a title to combine
(title 2). Press ENTER.
Confirmation window will appear.
DVR
ORG
DVD DVD
ORG PL
PROGRAM EDITING
DVR
PL
1
2
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
2
3
4
Combine theseprograms?
MAY/01/06
12:15PM
JUN/15/06
11:05AM
Yes
No
5
6
7
JUL/05/06
11:40PM
JUL/18/06
10:00AM
JUN/20/06
11:30AM
Using
/
,select “Yes”. Press ENTER.
6
7
Two titles will be combined into a single title.
PressTOP MENU to exit.
Note
• If the number of chapter marks in the combined
title exceeds 999, the combination will be rejected.
• If one of two titles in the Original List is deleted,
the combined new title will be deleted.
• The name of the title selected first will become
the name of the combined title.
• The title selected first will be the first half of the
combined title.
101
Editing
MovingTitles
VR
DVD-RW
DVR
[VR] [PLAYLIST]
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
You can move the title position.
POWER
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
If you are playing the DVR,press DVR first.
If you are playing a disc,press DVD first.
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
CHANNEL
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
Press TOP MENU.
1
Title List will appear.
Example:DVR Playlist
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
DVR
ORG
DVD DVD
ORG PL
PREVIOUS RECORDINGS
DVR
PL
SPACE
0
1
2
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
PROGRAM
1
2
5
3
SETUP
AUDIO
CLEAR
RECORDINGS
APR/01/06
12:15PM
MAY/01/06
12:15PM
JUN/04/06
10:00AM
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
4
6
JUN/15/06
11:05AM
JUL/05/06
11:40PM
JUL/18/06
10:00AM
ENTER
DISPLAY
RETURN
Press MENU / LIST to switch to Playlist
if necessary.
VARIABLE VARIABLE
REPLAY
SKIP
SKIP
Using
Press ENTER.
/
/
/
,select a desired title to move.
2
3
REV
PLAY
FWD
Title List Menu will appear.
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
DVD
DVR
ORG
DVD DVD
ORG PL
PREVIOUS RECORDINGS
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
DVR
PL
VCR
DVR
REC MONITOR
1
2
1
3
Play Fromm Start
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
Resume Play
Delete
APR/01/06
12:15PM
JUN/04/06
10:00AM
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
Edit
4
6
Dubbing
Search
JUN/15/06
11:05AM
JUL/05/06
11:40PM
JUL/18/06
10:00AM
Using
Edit Menu will appear.
/
,select “Edit”,then press ENTER.
DVR
ORG
DVD DVD
ORG PL
PROGRAM EDITING
DVR
PL
1
2
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
Delete
1
4
3
Edit Title Name
Scene Delete
APR/01/06
12:15PM
JUN/04/06
10:00AM
Divide
Combine
6
Move
Chapter Mark
AddToPlaylist
JUN/15/06
11:05AM
JUL/18/06
10:00AM
102
Editing
MovingTitles (Cont’d)
Using
/
,select “Move”,then press ENTER.
4
5
The selected title will become a single line.
DVR
ORG
DVD DVD
ORG PL
PROGRAM EDITING
DVR
PL
1
2
2
3
6
4
MAY/01/06
12:15PM
JUN/04/06
10:00AM
JUN/15/06
11:05AM
5
7
JUL/05/06
11:40PM
JUL/18/06
10:00AM
JUN/20/06
11:30AM
Using
/
/
/
,move the line to the desired
position,then press ENTER.
Confirmation window will appear.
DVR
ORG
DVD DVD
ORG PL
PROGRAM EDITING
DVR
PL
1
2
2
3
4
Move this program elsewhere?
MAY/01/06
12:15PM
UN/15/06
11:05AM
Yes
No
5
6
7
JUL/05/06
11:40PM
JUL/18/06
10:00AM
JUN/20/06
11:30AM
Using
/
,select “YES”. Press ENTER.
6
7
The title is now moved to the new position.
PressTOP MENU to exit.
Note
• When the total number of the titles exceeds 6,
press FWD g to move to the first title of the
next page, and press REV h to move to the last
title of the previous page.
103
Editing
Chapter Marker
Adding Chapter Marks
VR
DVD-RW
DVR
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
POWER
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
[VR] [ORIGINAL] [PLAYLIST]
You can add or delete chapter marks on each title and can
use them for the Chapter Search.
You can add up to 999 chapter marks anywhere you want.
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
CHANNEL
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
If you are playing the DVR,press DVR first.
If you are playing a disc,press DVD first.
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
Press TOP MENU.
Title List will appear.
1
SPACE
0
PROGRAM
Example:DVR Original List
SETUP
AUDIO
CLEAR
RECORDINGS
DVR DVD DVD
PL ORG PL
PREVIOUS RECORDINGS
DVR
ORG
1
2
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
CH12 XP
1
2
5
3
6
APR/01/06
12:15PM
MAY/01/06
12:15PM
JUN/04/06
10:00AM
ENTER
4
DISPLAY
RETURN
JUN/15/06
11:05AM
JUL/05/06
11:40PM
JUL/18/06
10:00AM
VARIABLE VARIABLE
REPLAY
SKIP
SKIP
REV
PLAY
FWD
Press MENU / LIST to switch Original List / Playlist
if necessary.
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
DVD
Using
/
,select a desired title to edit.
/
/
2
3
VCR
DVR
REC MONITOR
Press ENTER.
Title List Menu will appear.
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DVR DVD DVD
PL ORG PL
PREVIOUS RECORDINGS
JUN/04 10:00AM CH12 XP
DVR
ORG
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
1
2
CH12 XP
1
2
3
6
Play From Start
Resume Play
Protect
APR/01/06
12:15PM
JUN/04/06
10:00AM
Delete
4
Edit
Dubbing
Search
11:40PM
JUN/15/06
11:05AM
JUL/18/06
10:00AM
Using
/
,select “Edit”,then press ENTER.
Edit Menu will appear.
DVR DVD DVD
PL ORG PL
PROGRAM EDITING
DVR
ORG
1
2
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
CH12 XP
1
4
3
6
Protect
Delete
Edit Title Name
SceneDelete
APR/01/06
12:15PM
JUN/04/06
10:00AM
Chapter Mark
Add To Playlist
JUN/15/06
11:05AM
JUL/05/06
11:40PM
JUL/18/06
10:00AM
104
Editing
Chapter Marker (Cont’d)
Using
ENTER.
Editing Screen will appear.
/
,select “Chapter Mark”,then press
Using
,select “Yes”,then press ENTER.
/
4
10
11
Chapter marks are now added.
Press TOP MENU to exit.
DVR
ORG
CHAPTER MARKING
0:00:00
Note
•
When you search for the point to add a chapter mark,
you can use SKIP H / G, FWD h / REV g,
Add
Update
Cancel
VARIABLE REPLAY
/ VARIABLE SKIP
,
PAUSE k or PLAY B as usual.
• If there are chapter marks already set for the title,
they are indicated on the progress bar.
Press PLAY B to start playback.
Play the title up to the point where you want to set a
chapter marks.
5
6
When it reaches the desired point,press ENTER,or
press PAUSE F or STOP C and then ENTER.
Confirmation window will appear.
CHAPTER MARKING
DVR
ORG
0:00:10
Add chapteers here?
Yes No
Add
Update
Cancel
Using
,select “Yes”,then press ENTER. The
/
7
8
9
point will be marked with a single line.
Repeat steps 5 to 7 until you set as many chapter
marks as you want.
When you finish setting all the marks you want,select
“Update” using
,then press ENTER.
/
Final confirmation window will appear.
CHAPTER MARKING
DVR
ORG
0:00:25
Update?
Yes No
Add
Update
Cancel
• If you want to quit the entire process, select
“Cancel” using , then press ENTER.
/
105
Editing
Chapter Marker (Cont’d)
Deleting Chapter Marks
VR
DVD-RW
DVR
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
POWER
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
[VR] [ORIGINAL] [PLAYLIST]
If you are playing the DVR,press DVR first.
If you are playing a disc,press DVD first.
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
CHANNEL
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
Press TOP MENU.
1
Title List will appear.
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
Example:DVR Original List
PREVIOUS RECORDINGS
DVR DVD DVD
PL ORG PL
DVR
ORG
SPACE
0
1
2
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
CH12 XP
1
2
5
3
6
PROGRAM
SETUP
AUDIO
CLEAR
RECORDINGS
APR/01/06
12:15PM
MAY/01/06
12:15PM
JUN/04/06
10:00AM
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
4
JUN/15/06
11:05AM
JUL/05/06
11:40PM
JUL/18/06
10:00AM
ENTER
DISPLAY
RETURN
Press MENU / LIST to switch Original List / Playlist
if necessary.
VARIABLE VARIABLE
REPLAY
SKIP
SKIP
Using
Press ENTER.
Title List Menu will appear.
/
/
/
,select a desired title to edit.
2
3
REV
PLAY
FWD
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
DVD
DVR DVD DVD
PL ORG PL
PREVIOUS RECORDINGS
JUN/04 10:00AM CH12 XP
DVR
ORG
VCR
DVR
1
2
REC MONITOR
CH12 XP
1
2
3
6
Play From Start
Resume Play
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
Protect
APR/01/06
12:15PM
JUN/04/06
10:00AM
Delete
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
4
Edit
Dubbing
Search
11:40PM
JUN/15/06
11:05AM
JUL/18/06
10:00AM
Using
Edit Menu will appear.
/
,select “Edit”,then press ENTER.
DVR DVD DVD
PL ORG PL
PROGRAM EDITING
DVR
ORG
1
2
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
CH12 XP
1
4
3
6
Protect
Delete
Edit Title Name
SceneDelete
APR/01/06
12:15PM
JUN/04/06
10:00AM
Chapter Mark
Add To Playlist
JUN/15/06
11:05AM
JUL/05/06
11:40PM
JUL/18/06
10:00AM
106
Editing
Chapter Marker (Cont’d)
Using
ENTER.
Editing Screen will appear.
/
,select “Chapter Mark”,then press
4
5
DVR
ORG
CHAPTER MARKING
0:00:00
Add
Update
Cancel
Press to move to the progress bar,and then select
a chapter mark you want to delete using
press ENTER.
,then
/
Confirmation window will appear.
DVR
ORG
CHAPTER MARKING
0:00:00
Delete this chapter mark?
Yes
No
Add
Update
Cancel
Using
/
,select “Yes”,then press ENTER.
6
7
8
The chapter mark disappears.
Repeat steps 5 to 6 until you erase as many chapter
marks you want.
When you finish deleting all the unnecessary marks,
press to move back to the command bar.
Then using
/
,select “Update”.Press ENTER.
Confirmation window will appear.
CHAPTER MARKING
DVR
ORG
0:00:25
Update?
Yes No
Add
Update
Cancel
Using
,select“Yes”,then press ENTER.
/
9
The chapters marks are now deleted from the title.
Press TOP MENU to exit.
10
107
Editing
AddingTitles to a Playlist
VR
DVD-RW
DVR
[VR] [ORIGINAL] [PLAYLIST]
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
You can add a title to the Playlist as you prefer.
POWER
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
You can add up to 99 titles for DVDs and 300 titles for DVR.
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
If you are playing the DVR,press DVR first.
If you are playing a disc,press DVD first.
CHANNEL
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
Press TOP MENU.
Title List will appear.
1
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
Example:DVR Original List
SPACE
0
DVR DVD DVD
PL ORG PL
PREVIOUS RECORDINGS
DVR
ORG
1
2
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
CH12 XP
PROGRAM
SETUP
AUDIO
CLEAR
RECORDINGS
1
2
5
3
6
APR/01/06
12:15PM
MAY/01/06
12:15PM
JUN/04/06
10:00AM
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
4
JUN/15/06
11:05AM
JUL/05/06
11:40PM
JUL/18/06
10:00AM
ENTER
DISPLAY
RETURN
Press MENU / LIST to switch Original List / Playlist
if necessary.
VARIABLE VARIABLE
REPLAY
SKIP
SKIP
REV
PLAY
FWD
Using
/
,select a desired title to add to
/
/
2
3
the Playlist.Press ENTER.
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
DVD
Title List Menu will appear.
DVR DVD DVD
PL ORG PL
VCR
DVR
REC MONITOR
PREVIOUS RECORDINGS
JUN/04 10:00AM CH12 XP
DVR
ORG
1
2
CH12 XP
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
1
4
3
6
Play From Start
Resume Play
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
Protect
APR/01/06
12:15PM
JUN/04/06
10:00AM
Delete
Edit
Dubbing
Search
JUN/15/06
11:05AM
JUL/18/06
10:00AM
Using
/
,select “Edit”,then press ENTER.
Edit Menu will appear.
DVR DVD DVD
PL ORG PL
PROGRAM EDITING
DVR
ORG
1
2
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
CH12 XP
1
4
3
6
Protect
Delete
Edit Title Name
SceneDelete
APR/01/06
12:15PM
JUN/04/06
10:00AM
Chapter Mark
Add To Playlist
JUN/15/06
11:05AM
JUL/05/06
11:40PM
JUL/18/06
10:00AM
108
Editing
AddingTitles to a Playlist (Cont’d)
Using
ENTER.
/
,select “AddTo Playlist”,then press
4
Confirmation window will appear.
DVR DVD DVD
PL ORG PL
PROGRAM EDITING
DVR
ORG
1
2
APR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
CH12 XP
1
3
6
Protect
Delete
Make playlist program?
APR/01/06
12:15PM
JUN/04/06
10:00AM
No
Yes
Chapter Mark
4
Add To Playlist
JUN/15/06
11:05AM
JUL/05/06
11:40PM
JUL/18/06
10:00AM
Using
,select “Yes”,then press ENTER.
/
5
6
The selected title is now added to the Playlist, and
the Playlist will be displayed automatically.
Press TOP MENU to exit.
Note
• ForVR mode DVD-RW disc, if the Playlist contains
more than 99 titles or 999 chapters, “AddTo
Playlist” cannot be selected.
• For the DVR, if the Playlist contains more than 300
titles, “Add to Playlist” cannot be selected.
•
To delete titles from Playlist, refer to ‘Deleting Titles’
on pages 90-91.
109
Other Setups
Tour of the Setup Menus
The following table shows the items which you can change the setting and their default settings. Refer to the following table
for your convenience.
Setup Menu
OSD Language
Items
Page 21
Selection (highlight is the default) Contents
English
Set the language for OSD (on-screen display).
Français
Español
Clock Setting
Clock Setting
Page 25
Auto Clock Setting
Pages 24-25
Off
Auto
Manual
On
Daylight SavingTime
Page 26
Off
Channel Setting
Playback
Auto Preset
Manual Preset
TVAudio Select
Page 27
Pages 22-23
Page 23
Stereo
SAP
TVAspect
4 :3 Letter Box
4 :3 Pan & Scan
16 :9Wide
All
level 8 to 1
English
Pages 28
Parental Lock
Page 113
Disc Menu Language
Page 114
Set the parental level for DVD Disc Playback.
Set the language for Disc Menu.
French
Spanish
Other
Audio Language
Original
English
Set the language for audio.
Page 114
French
Spanish
Other
Subtitle Language
Off
English
Set the language for subtitles.
Page 114
French
Spanish
Other
Audio Out
PCM
48kHz
96kHz
Set whether the sound recorded in 96 kHz will
be down sampled in 48 kHz.
Page 115
Dolby Digital
PCM
Stream
Set the type of sound signal output from the digi-
tal audio output jack.
Dynamic Range Control
On
Compressing the range of sound volume.
Off
Fast Forward withAudio
On
Off
Set whether or not to output sound during fast
forward playback.
Variable Replay/Skip Speed
Variable Skip
5 seconds
15seconds
30seconds
1 minute
5 minutes
Variable Replay
5 seconds
15seconds
30seconds
1 minute
5 minutes
On
Set the amount of skip time when you press
Page 116
VARIABLE SKIP
.
Set the amount of rewind time when you press
VARIABLE REPLAY
.
Angle Icon
Page 117
Progressive
Page 117
Set whether or not to display the angle icon.
Set progressive scan on/off.
Off
On
Off
110
Other Setups
Tour of the Setup Menus (Cont’d)
Setup Menu
Record
Items
Auto Finalize
Pages 64-65
Selection (highlight is the default) Contents
Disc Full
On
Off
End of Timer Rec
On
Off
End of Dubbing
On
Off
Auto Chapter
Off
Page 37
5 minutes
10 minutes
15 minutes
30 minutes
60 minutes
L1 (Rear)
Video In
S-Video In
L2 (Front)
Video In
S-Video In
Auto
Display
SelectVideo
Set the video input type for the external input.
Page 60
FL Dimmer
Set the brightness of the Front Panel Display.
Set the idling time before the screen saver starts.
Page 119
Bright
Dark
On
Screen Saver
Page 119
Off
Reset to factory default
Page 120
Note
• If you change the settings in the Setup Menus, the information of the contents remain memorized even after the
power is turned off or the disc tray is opened or closed.
111
Other Setups
Playback Setting
Press SETUP.
1
“Easy Setting Menu” or “Advanced Menu” will appear.
If “Advanced Menu” is displayed, proceed to step 3.
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
POWER
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
Easy Setting Menu
DVD Menu
DVRMenu
InitialSetup
Timer Program
DVD Disc Format
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
DVD Recording Format
Finalize
CHANNEL
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
Disc Protect
Delete Playlist
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
Advanced Menu
SPACE
0
PROGRAM
SETUP
AUDIO
CLEAR
RECORDINGS
Using
Press ENTER.
/
,select “Advanced Menu”.
2
3
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
Using
Press ENTER.
/
,select “Initial Setup”.
ENTER
Advanced Menu
DISPLAY
RETURN
DVD Menu
OSD Language
Clock Setting
Channel Setting
Playback
DVR Menu
VARIABLE VARIABLE
REPLAY
SKIP
SKIP
Initial Setup
Timer Program
Record
REV
PLAY
FWD
Display
Easy Setting Menu
Reset to factory default
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
DVD
VCR
DVR
REC MONITOR
Using
/
,select “Playback”. Press ENTER.
4
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
Playback Menu will appear.
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
Playback
TV Aspect
Parental Lock
Disc Menu Language
Audio Laanguage
Subtitle Language
Audio Out
Variable Replay/Skip Speed
Angle Icon
Progressive
Using
Press ENTER.
/
,select a desired item to set.
5
Menu or option window will appear.
Referring to 1 to 8 on pages 113-117,set the
selected item.
6
7
When you finish with the setting, press SETUP to exit.
112
Other Setups
Playback Setting (Cont’d)
B:When a password has been set already.
Password input field will appear.
1. Parental Lock (Default: All)
You can set the Parental Lock Level to keep your children
from viewing the inappropriate materials.
(Follow the steps 1 to 4 on page 112.)
Password
_ _ _ _
Using
Press ENTER.
Option window will appear.
/
, select “Parental Lock”.
1 Using the Number Buttons,enter the 4-digit
password (The password will be displayed as“ ”for
*
your security.)
• If you haven't set a password, proceed to A.
• If you have already set a password, proceed to B.
Press ENTER.
Parental Level List will appear.
A:When a password has not been set yet.
Parental Level List will appear.
Parenttal Locck
All
8
Parental Lock
All
8
7
6
7
5
6
4
5
3
4
2
3
1
2
1
2 Using
/
,select a desired level,then press ENTER.
1 Using
/
,select a desired level,then press ENTER.
“Change Password?” will appear.
Confirmation window will appear.
Change Passsword?
Change Password?
Yes
No
Yes
No
• If you want to change the password,select “Yes” and
press ENTER.
The password input field will appear.Input the new
2 Using
,select “Yes”,then press ENTER.
/
Password input field will appear.
Password
_ _ _ _
password,then press ENTER.
The setting is now activated.
• If you only want to change the setting and not want to
change the password,select “No”,then press
ENTER.
3
Using the Number Buttons,enter the 4-digit password.
Press ENTER. Your setting is now activated.
Your setting is now activated.
Note
• Some DVD-Video discs feature the Parental Lock level.
Playback will stop if the disc’s general rating exceeds the
level you set. It will require you to enter a password
before the disc will be played back. This function prevents
your children from viewing inappropriate materials.
• Parental Lock may not be available on some discs.
•
Some DVDs may not completely support Parental
Lock. Be sure to check if the Parental Lock
operates in the way that you have set.
RATING
EXPLANATION
• Record the password in case you forget it.
• ALL-Parental Control is inactive; all discs can play.
• 8 - Adult material
• 7 - NC - 17 - Not appropriate for children under 17
• 6 - R - Restricted; parental approval required for
viewers under 18
• 4 - PG13 - Unsuitable for children under 13
• 3 - PG - Parental Guidance suggested
• 1 - G - General Audience; recommended for all ages
•
If you enter incorrect number, use to move back
to the number you want to correct and re-enter
the correct number.
• When you forget the password or you want to clear all
settings in Parental Lock, enter 4, 7, 3, 7 using the
Number Buttons in input window at step B. Password
will be cleared and Parental Lock Levels will be set to
“All”.
113
Other Setups
Playback Setting (Cont’d)
2. Disc Menu Language (Default:English)
You can set the language for Disc Menu.
4. Subtitle Language (Default:Off)
You can set the subtitle language.
(Follow steps 1 to 4 on page 112.)
(Follow steps 1 to 4 on page 112.)
Using
Press ENTER.
Option window will appear.
/
, select “Disc Menu Language”.
Using
Press ENTER.
Option window will appear.
/
, select “Subtitle Language”.
Disc Meenu Language
Subtitle Language
English
French
Spanish
Other
Off
English
French
Spanish
Other
• Using
Your setting is now activated.
/
,select a desired language. Press ENTER.
• Using
Your setting is now activated.
/
,select a desired language. Press ENTER.
If “Other” is selected,enter 4-digit code using
the Number buttons.
3. Audio Language (Default:Original)
You can set the Audio Language.
(Follow steps 1 to 4 on page 112.)
Code
_ _ _ _
Using
Press ENTER.
Option window will appear.
/
, select “Audio Language”.
When you finish entering the code,press ENTER. Refer
to‘Language Code’ on page 135.
Audio Language
Original
English
French
Spanish
Other
• Using
/
,select a desired language. Press ENTER.
Your setting is now activated.
• When “Original” is selected,the audio language will
be the disc’s default language.
114
Other Setups
Playback Setting (Cont’d)
Dolby Digital (Default:Stream)
5. Audio Out
You can set the digital audio output.
Dolby Digital
Stream
PCM
(Follow steps 1 to 4 on page 112.)
Using
Press ENTER.
Menu window will appear.
/
, select “Audio Out”.
• Using
Press ENTER.
Your setting is now activated.
/
,select a desired setting.
PCM:
Convert the Dolby Digital into “PCM”
(2 channel).
Audio Out
PCM
When your amplifier / decoder is NOT
compatible with Dolby Digital,set to PCM.
Dolby Digital
Dynamic Range Control
Fast Forward with Audio
Stream: Outputs Dolby Digital signals.
When your amplifier / decoder is compati-
ble with Dolby Digital,set to “Stream”.
• Using
Press ENTER.
/
,select a desired item to set.
Menu or Option window will appear.
Referring to the explanations below,set the selected item.
Note
When playing back a DVD-RW disc recorded
inVR mode
PCM (Default:48kHz)
• If the audio on a disc is recorded in Dolby Digital
format, set Dolby Digital to PCM so that you can
switch to main audio (L), sub audio (R), or a mix of
both (L / R) with your amplifier / decoder.
PCM
48kHz
96kHz
• Using
/
,select a desired setting.Press ENTER.
Your setting is now activated.
48kHz :If your amplifier / decoder is NOT compatible
with 96kHz PCM,select “48kHz”. 96kHz
sound will be output in 48kHz.
96kHz :If your amplifier / decoder is compatible with
96kHz PCM,select “96kHz”. 96kHz sound
will be output.
Note
When playing back disc with copyright protection
• Even if you select “96kHz”,the sound will be down
sampled at 48kHz.
115
Other Setups
Playback Setting (Cont’d)
Dynamic Range Control (Default:On)
6. Variable Replay / Skip Speed
You can set to“On” to compress the range between
Assign the VARIABLE REPLAY
VARIABLE SKIP button an
amount of time to rewind or skip.
(Follow steps 1 to 4 on page 112. See page 76 also.)
/
soft and loud sounds.
Dynamic Rannge Control
On
Off
Using , select “Variable Replay / Skip Speed ”.
Press ENTER.
Menu window will appear.
/
• Using
Press ENTER.
Your setting is now activated.
/
,select a desired setting.
Variable Replay/Skip Speed
Variable Skip
Fast Forward withAudio (Default:On)
You can set to “On” to output the sound during play-
back in x1.5 fast forward.
Variable Replay
Fast Forward with Audio
• Using
Press ENTER.
/
,select a desired item to set.
On
Off
Option window will appear.
Referring to the explanations below,set the selected
item.
• Using
Press ENTER.
/
,select a desired setting.
Your setting is now activated.
Variable Skip (Default:30 seconds)
Sets the amount of skip time for
VARIABLE SKIP
.
Variable Skip
5 seconds
15 seconds
30 secconds
Display
1 minute
5 minutes
Variable Replay (Default:30 seconds)
Sets the amount of rewind time for
VARIABLE REPLAY
.
Variable Replay
5 seconds
15 seconds
30 secconds
1 minute
5 minutes
116
Other Setups
Playback Setting (Cont’d)
7. Angle Icon (Default:Off)
You can set to “On” to show the Angle icon on the
screen whenever the feature is available.
(Follow steps 1 to 4 on page 112. See page 88 also.)
Using
/
, select “Angle Icon”.
Press ENTER.
Option window will appear.
Angle Icon
On
Off
• Using
/
,select a desired setting.
Press ENTER.
Your setting is now activated.
8. Progressive (Default:Off)
You can set to “On” to activate progressive scan.
(Follow steps 1 to 4 on page 112.)
Using
/
, select “Progressive”.
Press ENTER.
Option window will appear.
Progressive
On
Off
• Using
/
,select a desired setting.
Press ENTER.
Your setting is now activated.
117
Other Setups
Display Setting
Press SETUP.
1
“Easy Setting Menu” or “Advanced Menu” will appear.
If “Advanced Menu” is displayed, proceed to step 3.
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
POWER
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
Easy Setting Menu
DVD Menu
DVRMenu
InitialSetup
Timer Program
DVD Disc Format
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
DVD Recording Format
Finalize
CHANNEL
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
Disc Protect
Delete Playlist
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
Advanced Menu
SPACE
0
PROGRAM
SETUP
AUDIO
CLEAR
RECORDINGS
Using
Press ENTER.
/
,select “Advanced Menu”.
2
3
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
Using
/
,select “Initial Setup”. Press ENTER.
Advanced Menu
ENTER
DVD Menu
OSD Language
Clock Setting
Channel Setting
Playback
DISPLAY
RETURN
DVR Menu
Initial Setup
Timer Program
VARIABLE VARIABLE
REPLAY
SKIP
SKIP
Record
Display
REV
PLAY
FWD
Easy Setting Menu
Reset to factory default
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
DVD
VCR
DVR
REC MONITOR
Using
/
,select “Display”. Press ENTER.
4
5
Display Menu will appear.
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
Display
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
Select Video
FL Dimmer
Screen Saver
Using
Press ENTER.
Menu or option window will appear.
/
,select a desired item to set.
Referring to 1 and 2 on page 119,set the selected
item.
6
7
When you finish with the setting,press SETUP to exit.
118
Other Setups
Display Setting (Cont’d)
1. FL Dimmer (Default:Auto)
You can set the brightness of the Front Panel Display.
You can select a setting from “Auto”, “Bright”, or
“Dark”.When “Auto” is selected, the display turns
brighter when the power is on and darker when the power
is off.
(Follow steps 1 to 4 on page 118.)
Using
Press ENTER.
Option window will appear.
/
, select “FL Dimmer”.
FL Dimmer
Auto
Bright
Dark
• Using
/
select a desired setting. Press ENTER.
Your setting is now activated.
2. Screen Saver (Default:On)
You can set to “On” to activate the Screen Saver after 10
minutes of no activity.
(Follow steps 1 to 4 on page 118.)
Using
Press ENTER.
Option window will appear.
/
,select “Screen Saver”.
Screen Saver
On Off
• Using
/
,select a desired setting. Press ENTER.
Your setting is now activated.
119
Other Setups
Reset to Factory Default
Resets the settings to the factory default (refer to the
‘Note’ on this page for the exceptions).
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
Press SETUP.
POWER
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
1
“Easy Setting Menu” or “Advanced Menu” will appear.
If “Advanced Menu” is displayed, proceed to step 3.
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
Easy Setting Menu
CHANNEL
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
DVD Menu
DVRMenu
InitialSetup
Timer Program
DVD Disc Format
DVD Recording Format
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
Finalize
Disc Protect
Delete Playlist
SPACE
0
PROGRAM
Advanced Menu
SETUP
AUDIO
CLEAR
RECORDINGS
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
Using
Press ENTER.
/
,select “Advanced Menu”.
2
3
ENTER
Using
Press ENTER.
/
,select “Initial Setup”.
DISPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE VARIABLE
Advanced Menu
REPLAY
SKIP
SKIP
DVD Menu
OSD Language
Clock Setting
Channel Setting
Playback
REV
PLAY
FWD
DVR Menu
Initial Setup
Timer Program
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
DVD
Record
Display
VCR
DVR
REC MONITOR
Easy Setting Menu
Reset to factory default
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
Using
Press ENTER.
/
,select “Reset to factory default”.
4
5
Confirmation window will appear.
Reset to factory default OK?
Yes
No
Using
/
,select “Yes”. Press ENTER.
Final confirmation window will appear.
Are you sure?
Yes
No
Using
/
,select “Yes”. Press ENTER.
6
7
All setting are now reset to the factory default.
Note
• The settings listed below will remain unchanged
even after resetting to the factory default.
- OSD Language Setting
Press SETUP to exit.
- Clock Setting
- Parental Lock Setting
- Progressive Scan Setting
- DVR/DVD Timer Programs
- DVR Original List / Playlist
120
VCR functions
Guide to Display Information (VCR)
VCR
Press VCR first.
1
Playback status
2
Current channel number and an audio status of
the program.This information appears only in
the stop mode.
Rec Mode
Tape Counter
Press DISPLAY to show the information on the display.
1
3
4
5
Audio status of the current videotape
CH 21
STEREO
2
SP
0:00:00
HIFI
3
4
5
Note
•
This is an example screen only for explanation. Displayed
items will change depending on the actual mode.
121
VCR functions
Recording
Basic Recording
VCR
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
POWER
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
Before recording,make sure:
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
• The desired channel is selected by pressing the
Number Buttons or CHANNEL
/
.
CHANNEL
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
• There is a videotape with a record tab in the unit.
• The desired Rec Mode (SP:Standard Play or SLP:Super
Long Play) is selected by pressing REC MODE on the
remote control.
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
SPACE
0
Rec Mode
Tape speed
Type of tape
SP mode
Recording / PlaybackTime
PROGRAM
SETUP
AUDIO
CLEAR
RECORDINGS
T60
T120
T160
2-2 / 3 hours 3-1 / 2 hours
8 hours 10-1 / 2 hours
T210
1 hour
3 hours
2 hours
6 hours
SLP mode
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
• Stereo or SAP is selected. (See page 27.)
ENTER
Press VCR first.
DISPLAY
RETURN
Press REC / OTR (VCR) to begin the recording.
1
VARIABLE VARIABLE
To temporarily stop recording or to resume it, press
PAUSE F. After the unit has been in pause for five
minutes, it will stop automatically to protect the
videotape and the video head from damage.
REPLAY
SKIP
SKIP
REV
PLAY
FWD
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
DVD
Press STOP C when the recording is completed.
2
VCR
DVR
REC MONITOR
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
Note
• Although you can playback a videotape recorded in
the SP, LP, or SLP mode on this unit, LP mode
recording is not available.
• Timer Recording is not available withVCR.
• If a basic recording or One Touch Recording is in
progress on theVCR and the Timer Recording set for
DVR or DVD is about to begin, the unit will
automatically switch to the programmed channel 15
seconds before the programmed time and the
recording in progress on theVCR will be cancelled
UNLESS their recording channel is the same. If their
recording channel is the same, the Timer Recording
for DVR or DVD will start without cancelling the
recording currently in progress on theVCR. In this
case, the recording of the same channel will be made
on bothVCR and the DVR or DVD.
To view one channel while recording another:
1 If you want to watch the TV programs, simply
select the channel you want to watch with the TV’s
remote.
2 If you want to watch the cable TV or the satellite
TV programs, select the channel you want to
watch at the cable box or the satellite box.
Accidental erasure prevention
To prevent accidental recording on a
recorded videotape,remove its record tab.
To record on it later,cover the hole with
cellophane tape.
Record tab
122
VCR functions
Recording (Cont’d)
OneTouch Recording
VCR
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
POWER
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
This function allows you to set the recording length simply
by pressing REC / OTR (VCR).
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
Press VCR first.
CHANNEL
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
During normal recording,press REC / OTR (VCR)
to begin OneTouch Recording.
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
1
SPACE
0
You can select a fixed recording time by pressing
REC / OTR (VCR) repeatedly.
PROGRAM
SETUP
AUDIO
CLEAR
RECORDINGS
(0:30)
(1:00)
(Normal recording)
(8:00)
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
(7:30)
When One Touch Recording is finished, the unit will
turn off automatically.
ENTER
To change the recording length during the One
Touch Recording, press REC / OTR (VCR)
repeatedly until the desired length appear.
DISPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE VARIABLE
REPLAY
SKIP
SKIP
To cancel the One Touch Recording within the
specified time, press STOP C.
REV
PLAY
FWD
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
DVD
VCR
DVR
REC MONITOR
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
Note
• The remaining recording time will appear on the
display panel during a One Touch Recording. Press
DISPLAY to see it on the TV screen.
• You cannot pause a One Touch Recording.
• If a basic recording or One Touch Recording is in
progress on theVCR and the Timer Recording set for
DVR or DVD is about to begin, the unit will
automatically switch to the programmed channel 15
seconds before the programmed time and the
recording in progress on theVCR will be cancelled
UNLESS their recording channel is the same. If their
recording channel is the same, the Timer Recording
for DVR or DVD will start without cancelling the
recording currently in progress on theVCR. In this
case, the recording of the same channel will be made
on bothVCR and the DVR or DVD.
123
VCR functions
Playback
VCR
Turn on the TV. Select the appropriate external input
Channel. (See page 18.)
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
POWER
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
Press POWER on the remote control or the front
panel of the unit.
Turn on theTV. Select the appropriate external input
Channel.
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
1
CHANNEL
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
Press VCR first.
SPACE
0
Insert a prerecorded videotape. Press PLAY B to
begin playback.
PROGRAM
2
3
SETUP
AUDIO
CLEAR
RECORDINGS
• If there is no record tab, playback starts
automatically.
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
During playback, press PAUSE F.
ENTER
Playback will pause and sound will be muted.
DISPLAY
RETURN
Press PLAY B to resume playback.
VARIABLE VARIABLE
4
5
6
REPLAY
SKIP
SKIP
Press STOP C to stop playback.
REV
PLAY
FWD
Press STOP / EJECT C A on the front panel of the
unit to eject the videotape.
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
DVD
VCR
DVR
REC MONITOR
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
Note
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
•
Tracking will be automatically adjusted upon playback.To
adjust the tracking manually, press CHANNEL
/
.
OPEN
/
CLOSE
POWER
STOP/EJECT REW
F.FWD
PLAY
REC/OTR
CHANNEL
DUBBING
VCR
DVR
DVD
STOP
PLAY DVR REC/OTR DVD
VCR
DVD
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
DVR
DVD
VCR
DVR/DVD
POWER
STOP / EJECT C A
124
VCR functions
Search
Index Search
VCR
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
POWER
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
An index mark will be assigned at the beginning of each
recording you make. You may skip to a specific marked point
by following the steps below.
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
CHANNEL
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
Press VCR first.
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
Press SEARCH MODE so that the Index Input
Screen will appear.
1
SPACE
0
PROGRAM
Using the Number Buttons,enter the number of
recordings you wish to skip within 30 seconds.
SETUP
AUDIO
CLEAR
RECORDINGS
2
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
INDEX SEARCH
03
ENTER
DISPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE VARIABLE
REPLAY
SKIP
SKIP
• To exit the Index Input Screen, press STOP C.
REV
PLAY
FWD
Press FWD g / REV h to start the Index
Search.
3
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
DVD
If you want to go in the forward direction, press
FWD g.
VCR
DVR
REC MONITOR
If you want to go in the reverse direction, press
REV h.
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
After index search, theVCR will play the videotape
automatically.
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
CURRENT PROGRAM
Beginning
of tape
End
of tape
Pro.1 Pro.2 Pro.3 Pro.4 Pro.5
02
01
01
02
03
INDEX MARK
Note
• Every time a videotape is recorded, an index mark is
written on the videotape.
• Index Search and Time Search are not available during
recording.
125
VCR functions
Search (Cont’d)
Time Search
VCR
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
POWER
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
This function allows you to go to a specific point on a video-
tape by entering the exact amount of time you wish to skip
in order to reach the point.
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
CHANNEL
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
Press VCR first.
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
Press SEARCH MODE repeatedly so that theTime
Input Screen will appear.
1
SPACE
0
PROGRAM
Using the Number Buttons,enter your desired
time to skip with in 30 seconds.
SETUP
AUDIO
CLEAR
RECORDINGS
2
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
TIME SEARCH
2:50
ENTER
DISPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE VARIABLE
REPLAY
SKIP
SKIP
• To exit the Index Input Screen, press STOP C.
REV
PLAY
FWD
Press FWD g or REV h to startTime Search.
3
If you want to go in the forward direction, press
FWD g.
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
DVD
If you want to go in the reverse direction, press
REV h.
After Time Search, the unit will play the videotape
automatically.
VCR
DVR
REC MONITOR
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
Note
• Index Search and Time Search are not available during
recording.
• Press STOP C to stop the search.
• If the end of the videotape is reached during a
search, this unit will cancel the search and rewind the
videotape.
126
VCR functions
Other Operations
VCR
Note
• Still / slow / pause mode will be automatically
cancelled after 5 minutes to prevent damage to the
videotape and the video head.
• To return to playback from the Picture Search / Still /
Slow mode, press PLAY B.
Press VCR first.
Fast forward:
When the unit is in stop mode,press FWD g to fast for-
ward the videotape.
Rewind:
When the unit is in stop mode,press REV h to rewind
the videotape.
Your Selection
HIFI
MONO
Monaural
L+R
L-channel
R-channel
Type of recorded tape
To cue or review picture during playback
(Picture Search):
Press FWD g or REV h during playback.
Press it again and the unit will search in super high speed. (in
the SLP mode only)
non Hi-Fi tapes
Monaural
Monaural
Hi-Fi tapes
recorded in
Hi-Fi stereo
L
R
Hi-Fi tapes
recorded main
audio program
Main audio
program
Main audio
program
Main audio
program
To freeze the picture on theTV screen during
playback (Still mode):
Press PAUSE F. Each time you press the button,the pic-
ture will be forwarded by one frame.
Hi-Fi tapes
recorded second
audio program
Second audio Second audio Second audio
program program program
If the picture begins to vibrate vertically during the still
mode,stabilize the picture by pressing CHANNEL
/
.
If the picture is distorted or rolling vertically,adjust the ver-
tical hold control on yourTV,if equipped.
Counter Reset:
Press CLEAR.
To playback in slow motion:
Press SLOW
during playback or the still mode.
If the noise bars appear on theTV screen,you can reduce it
by pressing CHANNEL
/
.
Automatic rewind
When a videotape is played or fast forwarded to its end,the
videotape will rewind to the beginning,stop and eject itself.
Setting the Playback audio:
Press AUDIO on the remote control to select “Hi-Fi” or
“MONO” as your playback audio.
• If the unit is connected to a stereoTV,select “HIFI”.
• If the unit is connected to a monauralTV,select
“MONO”.
• If the videotape is recorded in monaural,the audio
mode is fixed to the monaural and cannot be changed.
127
Others
Troubleshooting
Before requesting service for this unit,check the table below for a possible cause of the problem you are experiencing. Some
simple checks or a minor adjustment on your part may eliminate the problem and restore proper performance.
General Operation
Error message
Cause & Solution
• The operation is not available.
Error
• The operation is not available during recording.
Now Recording.
Error
• The operation is not available during dubbing.
Now Dubbing.
Error
• The operation is not available since aTimer Recording will start soon.
Timer program starts soon.
Discs
Error message
Cause & Solution
Disc Error
• Invalid disc is inserted. Please insert a disc supported by this unit.
(See pages 29 and 66.)
Region Error
• A disc with the invalid region code is inserted.
This unit only supports the discs with region code 1 or ALL.
Please eject the disc.
Playback is not authorized
in your region.
Error
• No disc or an invalid disc is inserted. Please insert a disc supported
by this unit. (See pages 29 and 66.)
Please insert a valid disc.
Error
• The discs not supported by this unit cannot be formatted.
Please use the discs supported by this unit. (See page 29.)
• During DVR playback or recording, formatting will not be executed.
Stop the playback or recording.
Cannot format.
Error
• The discs not supported by this unit cannot be finalized.
Please use the discs supported by this unit. (See page 29.)
Cannot finalize.
Error
• The finalization of theVideo mode DVD discs made on other unit
cannot be undone.
Un-finalize cannot be performed.
Error
• Disc Protect is only available with theVR mode DVD-RW discs.
Other discs cannot be protedcted. (See page 62.)
Disc protect cannot be performed.
Timer Recording / Recording & Navigator
Error message
Cause & Solution
Error
• The entry for theTimer Recording is invalid.The recording duration must
be in 24 hour period.The end time must be later than the present time,
and the start time must be before 1-1-2055. Re-program theTimer
Recording correctly. (See pages 42-43.)
Prohibited timer program.
Error
• The maximum number of timer programs is exceeded.
Delete unnecessary timer programs. (See pages 42-43.)
Cannot register timer program.
128
Others
Troubleshooting (Cont’d)
Playback / Editing
Error message
Cause & Solution
Parental Lock On
• The current Parental Lock setting prohibits the playback.
Change the Parental Level. (See page 113.)
The current selected parental level
prohibits playback.
Error
• The maximum number of titles is exceeded.
Delete unnecessary titles. (See pages 90-91.)
Program Edit Error.
The number of titles is maximum.
Error
• The maximum number of chapters is exceeded.
Delete unnecessary chapter marks. (See pages 106-107.)
The number of chapters is maximum.
Error
• The maximum number of titles in the Playlist is exceeded.
Delete unnecessary titles in the Playlist. (See pages 92, 98-99.)
Program Edit Error.
The number of programs
in playlist is maximum.
Dubbing
Error message
Cause & Solution
Error
• No recording media is inside the unit. Insert the recordable media.
•
•
•
Recordable space is not enough. Make sure the recording media has enough space.
The device is in use for playback or recording. Stop the playback or recording.
The dubbing material is copy protected.You cannot dub the copy protected material.
Cannot dubbing now.
• You are trying to dub to the finalizedVideo mode DVD.You cannot dub to
the finalizedVideo mode DVDs.
Error
• The dubbing you are trying to make does not finish by 3 minutes before
theTimer Recording. Re-arrange the timer programs, or try dubbing
when there is noTimer Recording in standby.
Timer programmed.
No dubbing now.
• You are trying to add more than 32 titles to the Dubbing List.
Or the number of the titles or the chapters of the recording media exceeds
the max. Delete unnecessary titles or the chapters from the list.
Error
Cannot select program.
Error
• The recording function encountered a copy control signal.
• You cannot dub copy protected programs.
Copy guard detected.
Dubbing is stopped.
Error
• There is not enough space left on the DVR to finish the dubbing.
Delete the unnecessary titles in the Original List, or change the Rec Mode.
DVR remaining space error
Dubbing cannot be performed.
Error
• There is not enough space left on the DVD to finish the dubbing.
Insert a recordable DVD, delete the unnecessary titles in the Original List,
or change the Rec Mode.
DVD remaining space error
Dubbing cannot be performed.
129
Others
Troubleshooting (Cont’d)
Symptom
The power does not turn on.
Solution
• Check that the AC power cord is connected securely.
• Batteries of the remote control are weak.
• If above solutions do not work, press RESET on the front panel
with a sharp pointed object to re-start the unit. (See page 10.)
The unit turns on automatically without
any operation.
• During Auto Clock Setting, the POWER Light lights up.
• The unit turns on automatically 3 minutes before theTimer
Recording.
P
O
W
E
The OSD Language Setting Menu appears • Finish up the Language Setting procedure by selecting a
every time the power turns on.
language in the OSD Language Setting Menu. Press ENTER to
activate the setting.
R
The power turns off automatically .
• The power turns off automatically when abnormality is
detected on the disc. Press POWER or OPEN / CLOSE
A
to open the disc tray, and before it is opened completely, press
the button again.Then take out the disc.
• The power turns off automatically when an OTR is completed.
• There is a possibility that the safety device is working. Try
pressing RESET on the front panel with a sharp pointed object
to re-start the unit. (See page 10.)
Symptom
Solution
The unit does not function.
•
or error message appears if the operation is prohibited.
• Batteries of the remote control are weak or exhausted
• There is a possibility that the safety device is working. Try
pressing RESET on the front panel with a sharp pointed object
to re-start the unit. (See page 10.)
No picture, sound or menu appears on
the screen.
• Check if the connections are made securely and correctly.
• Check if the cables are not damaged.
G
E
• Check if a correct external input channel is selected on your
TV. (See page 18.)
N
E
• Check if you have comleted the Channel Setting.
R
A
L
Clock Setting and Channel Setting cannot • If aTimer Recording is in standby or if a recording is in
be performed.
progress, these operations cannot be performed. Delete timer
programs or stop the recording.
The unit does not operate properly.
• Moisture has condensed inside the unit. Remove the disc and
leave the unit turned on for about two hours until the moisture
evaporates. (See page 4.)
The abnormal display appears
in the Front Panel Display.
• There is a possibility that the safety device is working. Try
pressing RESET on the front panel with a sharp pointed object
to re-start the unit. (See page 10.)
130
Others
Troubleshooting (Cont’d)
Symptom
TV channels cannot be changed.
Solution
• Check if the connections are made securely and correctly.
C
H
A
N
N
E
• Check if the cables are not damaged.
• Try Channel Setting by following the steps on pages 22-23.
Only specific channels do not appear.
• The channels may be set to be skipped.
The external input channels (such as
L1 or L2) cannot be skipped.
•
This unit does not skip the external input channels.
This is not a malfunction.
L
Symptom
Solution
Recording is impossible.
•
This unit cannot record a program that contains copy protection
signal.This is not a malfunction.
• The space of the recording media may be used up.Try deleting
unnecessary titles from the Original List, or exchange it with
the recordable media.
• The maximum number of titles or chapters has exceeded.
Delete the unnecessary titles to make enough space or insert a
new recordable media.
• Check if the connections are made securely and correctly.
R
E
• Copy-once programs can only be recorded on a CPRM
compatibleVR mode DVD-RW.
• Check if the disc is not protected or finalized.
Undo the protection or the finalization.
• DVD-RW once formatted with other DVD recorders cannot
be recorded on this unit.This is not malfunction.
• Video mode DVDs recorded by other DVD recorders cannot
be used on this unit unless finalized.
Recording on the DVD disc is impossible.
C
O
R
D
I
N
G
• Check if the connections are made securely and correctly.
The image from the external device
cannot be displayed or recorded.
• Try pressing INPUT SELECT repeatedly.
•
Turn on the all connected devices.
• Check if the connections are made securely and correctly.
• The internal clock of the unit may have been stopped due to a
power failure that lasted for more than 30 seconds. Reset the
clock. (See pages 24-26.)
Timer Recording cannot be performed.
Recording to a videotape is impossible.
• Check if a videotape is inserted.
• Check if a videotape has a record tab intact.
131
Others
Troubleshooting (Cont’d)
Symptom
Disc Playback cannot be performed.
Solution
• Check if the playable disc is inserted.
• Check if the disc is loaded correctly with the labeled
side facing up.
• Discs made on other devices or on personal computers cannot
be played back on this unit unless it is finalized on the device.
Even if it is finalized, the performance of those discs are not
guranteed on this unit.
• The disc may be dirty or flawed. Clean the disc.
• Check if all the connections are made correctly.
• Check if the setting for the Progressive Scan is correct.
(See page 117.)
• Check the Parental Lock Setting. (See page 113.)
Playback does not start from
the beginning.
• Resume function may be activated. See page 72 to cancel the
resume point.
• Check theTV Aspect Ratio. (See page28)
• A different aspect ratio will be used when the aspect ratio
specified by the disc is not supported by this unit.
TV aspect ratio does not match
for yourTV screen.
Playback picture is distorted.
Color of the picture is abnormal.
•
During fast forward or fast reverse, playback picture may be
distored.This is not a malfunction.
• Connect toTV directly.When you connect this unit with the
television viaVCR or other devices, the pictue may be distorted
due to the copy-protection signal.
P
L
• Check if the cables are damaged.
• Keep the equipment which may cause electrical disturbances,
such as a cellular phone, away.
A
Y
B
A
C
K
There is no sound, or no subtitle.
•
•
Turn on all connected devices.
Check if the external input channel is set correctly.
• Check if the connections are made securely and correctly.
•
•
Check if the Audio Out Setting is set correctly. (See page 115)
There is a possibility that the selected subtitle language is not
supported by the disc.
Audio Out Setting can not be changed.
• If the audio source is in the Dolby Digital format, set the Dolby
Digital Setting to “PCM” in the Setup Menu. (See page 115)
Audio Language or the Subtitle Language
of the DVD can not be changed.
• Multilingual subtitles are not supported by the disc.
•
Some audio languages or the subtitle languages can be changed only
from the Disc Menu. Please refer to the disc’s manual.
Camera angles can not be changed.
• Even though the multi-angle feature is supported by the disc,
that does not mean all the scenes are shot from multi-angles.
Changing angles are available only for those scenes shot from
the multi-angle.
VCR picture is noisy.
• Adjust the tracking by pressing CHANNEL o /p while you
are playing a videotape.
DuringVCR playback, pictures do not
come out even though sound does.
• VCR Head cleaning may be necessary.
Refer to 'AUTO HEAD CLEANING' on page 136.
* If you are still having trouble with this unit after checking‘Troubleshooting’,write down the error code and the error
description,and call our helpline mentioned on the front page to locate anAuthorized Service Center.
132
Others
Troubleshooting (Cont’d)
Symptom
Titles can not be edited or deleted.
Solution
• The titles or the disc itself may be protected. Cancel the
protection by following the steps on page 93 for title
protection, and page 62 for disc protection.
• The titles in theVideo mode discs cannot be edited or deleted
if they are finalized. Undo the finalization by following the steps
on page 63.
E
D
I
The capacity of the disc doesn't increase
even if the recorded program is deleted.
• WithVideo mode DVD-RW discs, the disc space will increase
only when the last title in the Original List is deleted.With
DVD-R discs, deleting a title will not increase the disc space.
• Deleting a title in the Playlist will not increase the capacity, try
deleting a title in the Original List.
T
I
N
G
The disc cannot be played back on other
player even though it is finalized properly.
• Some DVD players do not play back the disc made on other
recorder. Refer to the manual of the palyer.
Dubbing cannot be executed.
• Video mode discs made on other recorder cannot be dubbed
using this unit.
• When the number of the titles or the chapters exceeds the
maximum recordable number, the dubbing will not be executed.
• Copy-once programs or the copy protected programs may not
be dubbed depending on the recording media.
Regarding the limitations on dubbing, refer to the page 47.
Symptom
Solution
R
E
M
O
T
E
The remote control does not function.
• No batteries in the remote or the batteries may be weak.
Replace the batteries.
• Make sure there is no obstacle between the remote and the
unit.
• Try getting closer to the unit. (See page 15.)
• Make sure to press the Device Select Button before operating
on the device of your choice.
• If above solutions do not solve the problem, please call our
helpline mentioned on the front page to locate an Authorized
Sercive Center for help.
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
Pressing SETUP does not do anything.
• While the Programmed Recordings Screen, the Dubbing Menu
Screen, or theTitle List is displayed or while the disc is loading,
the SETUP button does not respond.
Symptom
Solution
O
T
H
E
R
S
• Check that the AC power cord is connected securely.
The Clock display does not appear
in the Front Panel Display.
• (In case of power failure) Check the breaker and Clock Setting.
When you forget the password
for Parental Lock.
• Please cancel the password and the set level. (See page 113.)
133
Others
Glossary
Analog audio
Dolby Digital
Sampling frequency
An electrical signal that directly represents
sound. In contrast,digital audio which can be
an electrical signal,but is an indirect repre-
sentation of sound. See also Digital audio.
The system developed by Dolby
Laboratories to compress digital sound.
It offers you sound of stereo (2ch) or
multi-channel audio.
The rate which sound is measured by a
specified interval to turn it into digital
audio data. The numbers of sampling in
one second defines as sampling fre-
quency. The higher the rate,the better
the sound quality is.
Aspect ratio
Finalize
The width of aTV screen relative to its
height. ConventionalTVs are 4:3 (in other
words,the screen is almost square);
widescreen models are 16:9 (the screen is
almost twice as wide as it is high).
To make recorded contents on DVD
discs possible to be played back on DVD
players. With this unit,it is possible to
finalize DVD-RW/R discs.
SAP (SecondaryAudio Program)
Sub-audio channel which is delivered sep-
arately from main-audio channel. This
audio channel is used as an alternate in
bilingual broadcasting.
MP3 (MPEGAudio Layer 3)
Chapter
MP3 is a method of compressing files.
You can copy MP3 files on CD-RW / R
discs from the computer and play back
the files on this unit.
S-Video output
Just as a book is split up into several
chapters,a title on a DVD disc is usually
divided into chapters. See alsoTitle.
It delivers independently each signal of
color(C) and luminance(Y) toTV as video
signals,so that higher-quality picture will
be materialised.
Component video output
PCM (Pulse Code Modulation)
This is a video signal format that conveys
each of three principal colors of light (red,
blue and green) through different signal
lines. This allows the viewers to experi-
ence picture colors as original as it is.
There are several signal formats,including
PCM is a format that converts audio
into digital data. It is mainly used for
Audio CDs and DAT. This unit can play
back sounds as realistic as possible by
converting even compressed Dolby
Digital and MPEG audio to PCM.
Title (DVD only)
A collection of chapters on DVD disc.
See also chapter.
Track
Audio CDs use tracks to divide the con-
tent of a disc. The DVD equivalent is
called a chapter. See also Chapter.
Y / PB / PR andY / CB / CR
.
Playlist
CPRM (Content Protection for
Recordable Media)
This is a format used to record copy-once sequence. Also it allows to search a
programs. By recording coded data on
the area of DVD discs that ordinary writ-
ing software cannot write on,it prevents
copy-once programs from being recorded
repeatedly on different media.
From this list you can play back con-
tents of a disc in your desired order or
WMA
WMA is the audio file compressing
technology developed by Microsoft.
You can copyWMA files on CD-RW /
R discs from a computer and play them
specific scene directly.
Progressive scan (480p)
A type of display that does not split
each frame into fields,and instead scans back on this unit.
directly through all the scanlines of
each frame in order.Progressive scan
provides less flickering and higher
image resolution than traditional (480i)
TV signals.
See page 17 for instructions on selec-
tive progressive scan mode.
Regions code
Regions associate discs and players with
particular areas of the world. This unit
will only play back discs that have com-
patible region codes. You can find the
region code of your unit by looking at the
rear panel. Some discs are compatible
with more than one region (or all
regions).
Digital audio
An indirect representation of sound by
numbers. During recording,the sound
is measured at discrete intervals (44,
100 times a second for CD audio) by
an analog-to-digital converter,generat-
ing a stream of numbers. On playback,
a digital-to-analog converter generates
an analog signal based on these num-
bers. See also Sampling frequency and
Analog audio.
134
Others
Language Code
Language
Code
Language
Code
Language
Code
Language
Code
Abkhazian
Afar
Afrikaans
Albanian
Amharic
Arabic
Armenian
Assamese
Aymara
Azerbaijani
Bashkir
4748
4747
4752
6563
4759
4764
5471
4765
4771
4772
4847
5167
4860
5072
4854
4855
4864
4853
5971
4851
5759
4947
7254
4961
5464
4965
5047
6058
5160
5161
5166
5261
5256
5255
French
Frisian
5264
5271
5358
5747
5051
5158
5758
5360
5367
5447
5569
5455
5467
5565
5560
5547
5551
5557
5347
5566
5647
5669
5760
5765
5757
6469
5771
6460
5761
5767
5861
5847
5868
5860
Lithuanian
Macedonian
Malagasy
Malay
Malayalam
Maltese
Maori
Marathi
Moldavian
Mongolian
Nauru
Nepali
Norwegian
Occitan
Oromo (Afan)
Oriya
Panjabi
Pashto; Pushto
Persian
Polish
Portuguese
Quechua
Rhaeto-Romance
Romanian
Russian
5866
5957
5953
5965
5958
5966
5955
5964
5961
5960
6047
6051
6061
6149
6159
6164
6247
6265
5247
6258
6266
6367
6459
6461
6467
6559
6553
6547
5350
6564
6554
6566
6660
6560
Sindhi
Singhalese
Siswat
6550
6555
6565
6557
6558
6561
5165
6567
6569
6568
6658
6653
6647
6666
6651
6654
4861
6655
6661
6665
6664
6657
6669
6757
6764
6772
6855
6861
4971
6961
7054
5655
7161
7267
Galician
Georgian
German
Greek
Greenlandic
Guarani
Gujarati
Hausa
Slovak
Slovenian
Somali
Spanish
Sundanese
Swahili
Swedish
Tagalog
Tajik
Hebrew
Hindi
Basque
Bengali;Bangla
Bhutani
Bihari
Bislama
Breton
Bulgarian
Burmese
Byelorussian
Cambodian
Catalan
Chinese
Corsican
Croatian
Czech
Danish
Dutch
English
Esperanto
Estonian
Faroese
Fiji
Hungarian
Icelandic
Indonesian
Interlingua
Interlingue
Inupiak
Tamil
Tatar
Telugu
Thai
Tibetan
Tigrinya
Tonga
Tsonga
Turkish
Turkmen
Twi
Ukrainian
Urdu
Irish
Italian
Japanese
Javanese
Kannada
Kashmiri
Kazakh
Kinyarwanda
Kirghiz
Kirundi
Samoan
Sangho
Sanskrit
Scots Gaelic
Serbian
Serbo-Croatian
Sesotho
Setswana
Shona
Uzbek
Vietnamese
Volapuk
Welsh
Korean
Kurdish
Laothian
Latin
Latvian; Lettish
Lingala
Wolof
Xhosa
Yiddish
Yoruba
Zulu
Finnish
135
Others
Maintenance
SERVICING
• Please refer to relevant topics on the‘Troubleshooting’ on pages 128–133 before returning the product.
• If this unit becomes inoperative,do not try to correct the problem by yourself. There are no user-serviceable parts
inside. Turn off,unplug the power plug and please call our help line mentioned on the front page to locate anAuthorized
Service Center.
CLEANINGTHE CABINET
• Use a soft cloth slightly moistened with a mild detergent solution. Do not use a solution containing alcohol,spirits,
ammonia or abrasive.
DVR
DVR HANDLING
• DVR is a precision apparatus that is susceptible to vibration,strong impact or dirt.
Depending on the installation environment or handling,the unit may become partially damaged or in the worst case,
recording or replaying may not be available.Especially while the DVR is in motion,do not subject it to vibration or
strong impact or pull out the power plug. And if a power failure occurs the content of the recording/replaying pro-
gram may be lost.
DVR
MOVING THE UNIT
• DVR rotates at high speed when in operation.Be sure that rotation has stopped and then move the unit without sub-
jecting it to strong impact or vibration.
DVD
CLEANING DISCS
•When a disc becomes dirty,clean it with a cleaning cloth. Wipe the disc from the center out. Do not wipe in a circu-
lar motion.
• Do not use solvents such as benzine,thinner,commercially available cleaners,detergent,abrasive cleaning agents or
antistatic spray intended for analogue records.
DVD
CLEANINGTHE DISC LENS
• If this unit still does not perform properly although you refer to the relevant sections and to‘Troubleshooting’ in this
Owner’s Manual,the laser optical pickup unit may be dirty. Consult your dealer or anAuthorized Service Center for
inspection and cleaning of the laser optical pickup unit.
DVD
DISC HANDLING
• Handle the discs so that fingerprints and dust do not adhere to the surfaces of the discs.
•Always store the disc in its protective case when it is not used.
VCR
AUTO HEAD CLEANING
•Automatically cleans video heads as you insert or remove a videotape,so you can see a clear picture.
• Playback picture may become blurred or interrupted while theTV program reception is clear. Dirt accumulated on
the video heads after a long period of use,or the usage of rental or worn tapes can cause this problem. If a streaky
or snowy picture appears during playback,the video heads in the unit may need to be cleaned.
1.Please visit your localAudio /Video store and purchase a good qualityVHSVideo Head Cleaner.
2.If aVideo Head Cleaner does not solve the problem,please call our help line mentioned on the front page to locate
anAuthorized Service Center.
NOTES:
• Remember to read the instructions along with the video head cleaner before use.
• Clean video heads only when problems occur.
136
Others
FrequentlyAsked Questions
–– Can I record on CD-R / RW?
No,this unit records only DVDs.
–– Can I play back DVD-Video that is bought in another country?
Possible only if the region code of the disc is 1 orALL.
–– Is this unit JPEG compatible?
No.
–– Can I connect the unit to my PC?
No,you cannot control the unit by PCs.
Specification
General
System
Dimensions
(width x height x depth)
DVR, DVD-Video, DVD-RW/R, CD-DA,
CD-RW/R, VCR
17 1/8" x 3 15/16" x 14 15/16"
(435 x 99.5 x 380 mm)
41ºF to 104ºF (5ºC to 40ºC)
less than 80% (non condensing)
NTSC
VCR video heads
DVR
Power requirements
Power consumption
Weight
Four heads
Internal 3.5 inch HDD 80 GB
AC120V, 60 Hz
44W (standby: 4.6W)
12.2 lbs ( 5.53 kg )
Operating temperature
Operating humidity
TV format
Recording
Video recording format
Sampling frequency
Recording format
Video Recording Format (DVD-RW only),
Video Format (DVD-RW, DVD-R)
13.5MHz
Compression format
MPEG
Audio recording format
Recordable discs
DVD-ReWritable,
DVD-Recordable
Sampling frequency
Compression format
48kHz
Dolby Digital
Tuner
Receivable channels
VHF
UHF
CATV
2-13ch
14-69ch
C1-C125ch
Input/Output
Video output
Output level
Jacks
Input 1 (rear), 2 (front)
1Vp-p (75Ω)
RCA jack
Video input
Input level
Jacks
1Vp-p (75Ω)
RCA jack
S-Video output
Y (Iuminance)
- Output level
C (color)
- Output level
Jack
Input 1 (rear), 2 (front)
S-Video input
Y (Iuminance)
- Input level
C (color)
- Input level
Jacks
1Vp-p (75Ω)
1Vp-p (75Ω)
286 mVp-p (75Ω)
4 pin mini DIN
286 mVp-p (75Ω)
4 pin mini DIN
Audio input
During audio input
Jacks
Audio output
During audio output
Jacks
Input 1 (rear), 2 (front) L/R
2V rms (47kΩ)
RCA jacks
Output 1,2 L/R
2V rms (47kΩ)
RCA jacks
Digital audio output
Output level
Jack
Component video output
500 mVp-p (75Ω)
RCA jack
Output level
Y: 1.0Vp-p (75Ω),
B/CB, PR/CR: 0.7Vp-p (75Ω)
RCA jacks
P
Jacks
VHF/UHF antenna
VHF/UHF set 75Ω
input/output terminal
Note
The specifications and design of this product are subject to change without notice.
137
Español
Descripción Funcional
2
3
4
5
6*
7
8
Panel Delantero
La unidad también puede encen-
derse presionando estos botones.
*
OPEN
/
CLOSE
POWER
STOP/EJECT REW
F.FWD
VCR
PLAY
REC/OTR
CHANNEL
DUBBING
VCR
DVR
DVD
STOP
PLAY DVR REC/OTR DVD
VCR
DVD
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
DVR
DVD
DVR/DVD
1
25 23
26 24 22
21
20
19 17
18
15* 13 1211 10
14*
9
16
1 POWER
2 Luz de POWER
3 Luz de REC/OTR (VCR)
4 Compartimiento de casete
5 Luz de Doblaje
6 OPEN / CLOSE A * (DVD)
7 Luz de REC/OTR (DVR/DVD)
8 Bandeja de disco
10 VIDEO IN (LINEA 2)
11 S-VIDEO IN (LINEA 2)
12 REINICIALIZADO
13 REC / OTR I (DVR / DVD)
14 PLAY B* (DVR / DVD)
15 STOP C * (DVR / DVD)
16 Botones Selección de
Dispositivo / Indicadores
(VCR/DVR/DVD)
18 DUBBINGVCR➞DVD
19 CHANNEL K /
20 Pantalla del Panel Delantero
21 Sensor de control remoto
22 REC / OTR I (VCR)
23 PLAY B (VCR)
L
24 F.FWD D (VCR)
25 REW E (VCR)
9 AUDIO IN (LINEA 2)
26 STOP / EJECT
C
A (VCR)
17 DUBBING DVR➞DVD
2
3
4
5
6
Panel trasero
DVR/DVD
DVR/DVD/VCR
AUDIO IN AUDIO OUT ANTENNA
IN
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
DVR/DVD
S-VIDEO
Y
L
L
DIGITAL
AUDIO
AUDIO OUT
OUT
DVR/DVD/VCR
L
PB/CB
PR/CR
R
R
COAXIAL
IN
VIDEO IN VIDEO OUT
R
OUT
OUT
DVR/DVD
1
1 Cable eléctrico de CA
2 S-VIDEO IN (LINEA 1)
12 11
10
9
8
7
5 AUDIO OUT
6 TVANTENNA IN
9 VIDEO IN (LINEA 1)
10 S-VIDEO OUT (DVR / DVD)
3 COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
(DVR / DVD)
4 AUDIO IN (LINEA 1)
7 TVANTENNA OUT
8 VIDEO OUT
11 AUDIO OUT (DVR / DVD)
12 COAXIAL DIGITALAUDIO
OUT (DVR / DVD)
1 POWER
2 Botones Numéricos
19 CLEAR
20 AUDIO
15
Control
remoto
16
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
POWER
PROG. SELECT
17*
3 PROGRAM RECORDINGS
4 SETUP
5 MENU / LIST (DVR / DVD)
21 TOP MENU (DVR / DVD)
22 ENTER
23 RETURN
1
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
CHANNEL
18
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
2
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
6 Cursor
7 DISPLAY
/
/
/
24 VARIABLE SKIP
(DVR / DVD)
25 VARIABLE REPLAY
/ DVD)
SPACE
0
PROGRAM
SETUP
AUDIO
CLEAR
RECORDINGS
19
3
4
(DVR
20
8 SKIP j / i (DVR / DVD)
9 REV
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
21
5
E
22
ENTER
6
26 FWD
27 STOP C *
28 PAUSE
D
10 PLAY B *
11 SLOW
DISPLAY
RETURN
23
7
8
VARIABLE VARIABLE
(VCR)
SKIP
REPLAY
SKIP
24
25
26
27*
F
REV
PLAY
FWD
12 REC MONITOR
9
10*
Botones Selección de
Dispositivo:
(DVR / DVD)
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
DVD
28
29
11
VCR
DVR
REC MONITOR
13 REC MODE
30
31
32
33
34
12
13
14
29 VCR
30 DVR
31 DVD
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
14 DUBBING MENU
15 TIMER PROG.
16 INPUT SELECT
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
35
En DVR / DVD
La unidad también
puede encenderse
presionando estos
botones.
*
32 REC / OTR (VCR)
33 REC / OTR (DVR)
34 REC / OTR (DVD)
35 SEARCH MODE (VCR)
17 OPEN / CLOSE EJECT
A
(DVD /VCR)*
18 CHANNEL
/
138
Español
Conexión a unTV
Antena
Antena
(Atrás delTV)
Señal de
TV cable
Señal de
TV cable
Enchufe el
cable
eléctrico de
esta unidad.
4
(Atrás delTV)
3
o
o
Conecte
Cable RF
(entregado)
1
DVR/DVD
DVR/DVD/VCR
AUDIO IN AUDIO OUT ANTENNA
IN
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
Desconecte
/DVD
AUDIO
OUT
S-VIDEO
Y
L
L
T
DVR/DVD/VCR
L
PB/CB
PR/CR
R
R
IN
VIDEO IN VIDEO OUT
2
Nota
R
OUT
OUT
Conecte
• Puede conectar a un TV
con cables A/V o cable RF.
DVR/DVD
(Atrás de esta unidad)
Haga una de las siguientes conexiones, según la capacidad de su equipo existente.
(V = Hay,
-
= No hay)
Conexiones de video
Conexion de Audio Básico
Calidad de la imagen
Básico
Bueno
Mejor
V
TV
V
O
V
O
DVR/DVD
VCR
V (
)
-
-
necesario
AUDIO IN
(Compatible con el
modo de escaneo
progresivo)
COMPONENT
VIDEO IN
VIDEO IN
S-VIDEO IN
TV
Y
Esta unidad
PB/CB
PR/CR
O
CableVideo
(entregado)
Cable
S-Video
(en venta en
Cable de video
componente
(en venta en
Cable de audio
(entregado)
los comercios)
los comercios)
DVR/DVD/VCR
AUDIO OUT
DVR/DVD
AUDIO
OUT
L
DVR/DVD
DVR/DVD/VCR
AUDIO IN AUDIO OUT A
I
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
DVR/DVD
S-VIDEO
Y
L
L
L
DIGITAL
AUDIO
AUDIO OUT
OUT
R
DVR/DVD/VCR
DVR/DVD
L
PB/CB
PR/CR
R
R
S-VIDEO
DVR/DVD/VCR
AUDIO OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
COAXIAL
IN
VIDEO IN VIDEO OUT
VIDEO OUT
R
OUT
Y
R
L
Esta unidad
DVR/DVD
DVR/DVD/VCR
IN
PB/CB
PR/CR
R
VIDEO OUT
OUT
• Estas tomas sólo son útiles
en el modo DVR / DVD.
DVR/DVD
AUDIO OUT
VIDEO OUT
S-VIDEO OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
Si suTV es compatible con el escaneo progresivo 525 ó 625 y desea disfrutar de la imagen de alta calidad;
Utilice la conexión COMPONENT VIDEO OUT, ajuste el “Progresivo” a “On” en el Menú de Preparación (vea la
página 117) y asegúrese que la indicación “P.SCAN” está activada en la Pantalla del Panel Delantero.
Si suTV no es compatible con el escaneo progresivo;
Si su TV no es compatible con el escaneo progresivo ajuste “Progresivo” a “Off” en el Menú de Preparación y
asegúrese que la indicación “P.SCAN” está activada en la Pantalla del Panel Delantero.
Después de terminar las conexiones
Encienda su TV al canal de entrada externo adecuado (normalmente cerca del canal 0) para ver la salida de imágenes de
esta unidad en el TV. Para encontrar el canal de entrada externo,presione repetidamente el botón de canal en el remoto
de su TV hasta que aparezca la imagen de la grabadora de DVD.
139
Español
Configuraciones iniciales
Primera vez que encienda la unidad
Después de hacer todas las conexiones necesarias
encienda elTV y seleccione el canal de entrada
externo adecuado.(vea la página 139.)
1
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
POWER
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
Presione POWER. Aparecerá la pantalla de abajo.
2
Este menú puede no aparecer si ya activó la unidad
antes.Vea las páginas 21-24 del Manual de
Instrucciones en este caso.
CHANNEL
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
OSD Lannguage
English
SPACE
0
Français
Español
PROGRAM
SETUP
AUDIO
CLEAR
RECORDINGS
Si presiona PLAY B en este punto, se seleccionará
automáticamente “English” y puede saltear los
pasos 3 y 4.
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
Presione
/
para seleccionar “English”,
3
4
ENTER
“Français” o “Español”.Presione ENTER.
Después de seleccionar el idioma,la Configuración
Automática de Canales empezará automáticamente.
DISPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE VARIABLE
REPLAY
SKIP
SKIP
Después de terminar la ConfiguraciónAutomática de
Canales de Canales,se activará automáticamente la Función
Automática de Reloj y se ajustará a la hora correcta.
REV
PLAY
FWD
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
DVD
Ajuste de audio del TV
VCR
DVR
REC MONITOR
Presione SETUP.
1
2
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
Utilice
/
para seleccionar “Config.Inic.”.
Presione ENTER.
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
Utilice para seleccionar “Configur.Canal”.
Presione ENTER.
Aparecerá el Menú de Configuración de Canal.
/
3
Configgur. Canal
Ajuste Auto
Ajuste Manual
Selec. de Audio de TV
Utilice
/
para seleccionar
4
Notas para el audio del canal deTV
• Consulte el siguiente cuadro para comprobar una
configuración adecuada.
“Selec.deAudio deTV”.Presione ENTER.
Aparecerá la ventana de Opciones.
Selec. de Audio de TV
Audio transmitido
Estéreo
SAP
Audio
Grabación de
DVR/DVD/VCR
Canal audio Canal audio seleccionado
principal
secundario
ESTÉREO SAP
ESTÉREO NONE
ESTÉREO
ESTÉREO
MONO
MONO
SAP
ESTÉREO
SAP
MONO
Utilice
Presione ENTER.
Estéreo:
/
para seleccionar “Estéreo” o “SAP”.
5
Estéreo
SAP
MONO
MONO
SAP
NONE
Sale audio principal.
ESTÉREO SAP
ESTÉREO NONE
SAP (Programa deAudio Secundario):
Sale el audio secundario.
MONO
MONO
SAP
NONE
Presione SETUP para salir.
6
140
Español
Grabación en DVR / DVD
Recordable disc
Modo gra
Discos que pueden utilizarse con esta grabadora:
Puede seleccionar un Modo gra entre las seis opciones y el
tiempo de grabación y la cualidad de imagen/audio del
material grabado depende del Modo gra seleccionado.
•
•
Disco DVD-R:hasta 16x (se recomienda un disco de 4x u 8x)
Disco DVD-RW:2x y 4x (se recomienda un disco de 2x)
Tamaño
de disco
Modo
gra
Tiempo de
Calidad de
grabación video/Sonido
Discos inspeccionados y prueban que son compatibles con esta
grabadora:
(bueno)
XP
SP
18 min
36 min
72 min
108 min
144 min
180 min
LP
Disco de
8 cm
MAXELL discos DVD-R 4x
TDK discos DVD-RW 2x
JVC discos DVD-RW 4x
VERBATIM discos DVD-R 8x
EP
SLP
SEP
(malo)
(bueno)
XP
SP
60 min
120 min
240 min
360 min
480 min
600 min
Tipo de disco Formato de disco Funciones
LP
Disco de
12cm
Modo deVideo Reproducción, grabación,
EP
Video
DVD-RW
edición limitada
SLP
SEP
Reproducción, grabación,
Modo deVR
(malo)
edición de Lista Original /
Playlist
DVD-RW
VR
DVD-RW
(bueno)
XP
SP
17
34
68
H
H
H
LP
DVR
Reproducción, grabación
limitada, edición limitada
Modo deVideo
EP
102 H
136 H
170 H
DVD-R
SLP
SEP
DVD-R
(malo)
Para seleccionar el Modo gra preferido,presione
Los reproductores de DVD con
son capaces de repro-
repetidamente REC MODE.
ducir discos DVD-RW grabados en el modo deVR.
Formateado de un disco
VR
Video
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
El tipo de formato de grabación seleccionado aquí se
memorizará y aplicará al disco siempre que formatee los
discos DVD-RW.
POWER
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
Presione SETUP.
1
2
CHANNEL
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
Utilice
/
para seleccionar “Menú DVD”.
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
Presione ENTER.
SPACE
0
Utilice
Presione ENTER.
Aparecerá la ventana de Opciones.
/
para seleccionar “Formato grabac.DVD”.
3
PROGRAM
SETUP
AUDIO
CLEAR
RECORDINGS
Formato grabbac. DVD
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
VR
Video
ENTER
Utilice
Presione ENTER.
/
para seleccionar “VR” o “Video”.
DISPLAY
RETURN
4
VARIABLE VARIABLE
REPLAY
SKIP
SKIP
Format Auto
Cuando coloque un disco DVD-RW completamente nuevo,
la unidad formateará automáticamente el disco en el tipo de
formato de grabación seleccionado en esta sección.
REV
PLAY
FWD
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
141
Español
Grabación en DVR / DVD (Cont.)
Grabación básica
VR
DVD-RW
Video
DVD-RW
DVD-R
DVR
Lo siguiente le ayudará a entender fácilmente cómo grabar en DVR interno o en DVD.
Asegúrese que hay pilas en el control remoto y que ha conectado correctamente esta unidad y elTV.
Paso 1:Elija el tipo de disco y el Formato de grabac.
(Sólo si está grabando a un DVD.)
o
Paso 2:Preparación del medio
2 Seleccione el equipo que desea
4 Cierre la bandeja del
disco.
3Abra la bandeja del disco y
coloque un disco en la bandeja.
1 Para encender.
utilizar.(Si está grabando en DVR,
salte desde el paso 3.)
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
POWER
POWER
POWER
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
PROG. SELECT
POWER
PROG. SELECT
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
CHANNEL
DVD
GHI
JKL
MNO
DVR
VCR
REC MONITOR
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
Puede demorar en
cargar el disco.
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
SPACE
0
SPACE
0
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
• Si carga un disco DVD-RW completamente nuevo, el Formato Auto empezará automáticamente.
Paso 5:Empiece a grabar.
• Cuando graba en DVR:Presione REC / OTR (DVR).
• Cuando graba en DVD:Presione REC / OTR (DVD).
Paso 3:Seleccione el modo de grabación.
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
MODO DVR
VCR
DVR
DVD
REC MONITOR
VCR
DVR
DVD
REC MONITOR
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
I
DVR Gra
LP 65:56
0:06:50
CH8
DVR
CH8
LP 65:56
Paso 6:Pare la grabación.
Paso 4:Seleccione el canal que desea
grabar.
SKIP
REV
REPLAY
SKIP
MODO DVR
PLAY
FWD
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
DVD
CH
8
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
POWER
PROG. SELECT
VCR
DVR
REC MONITOR
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
CHANNEL
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
IC
DVR Det. grab
LP 65:56
0:06:50
CH8
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
SPACE
0
Esta operación puede
PROGRAM
demorar en reconocerse.
Nota
El DVR es un lugar de memorización temporal.
•
El DVR no es un lugar de memoria permanente del contenido grabado.Asegúrese de utilizar como lugar de memoria
temporal hasta que mire los programas una vez, edite o copie en un disco DVD o videocinta.
Disco duro de 80 GB
•Esta unidad tiene un disco duro de 80 GB que permite grabar hasta 170 horas (en el modo SEP).
142
Español
Grabación en DVR / DVD (Cont.)
Doblaje básico
VR
DVD-RW
Video
DVD-RW
DVD-R
DVR
VCR
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
POWER
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
Se mostró como ejemplo en la figura el doblaje de DVR a
DVD. Consulte el Manual de instrucciones sobre la forma de
hacer otros tipos de doblaje.
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
Presione DUBBING MENU.
1
CHANNEL
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
Aparecerán el Sentido doblaje y el Menú de Modo gra.
DOBLAJE
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
Sentido doblaje
Modo gra
Alto
XP
SP
LP
EP
SLP
SEP
Auto
DVR
DVD
DVR
VCR
DVD
VCR
DVD
DVR
VCR
DVR
VCR
DVD
SPACE
0
PROGRAM
SETUP
AUDIO
CLEAR
RECORDINGS
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
ENTER
Utilice
/
y seleccione el sentido de doblaje
2
DISPLAY
RETURN
deseado y presione ENTER.
Ejemplo:DVR ➞ DVD
VARIABLE VARIABLE
REPLAY
SKIP
SKIP
DOBLAJE
Sentido doblaje
Modo gra
REV
PLAY
FWD
Alto
XP
SP
LP
EP
SLP
SEP
Auto
DVR
DVD
DVR
VCR
DVD
VCR
DVD
DVR
VCR
DVR
VCR
DVD
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
DVD
VCR
DVR
REC MONITOR
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
Utilice
Presione ENTER.
Aparecerá el Menú Superior de Doblaje.
/
y seleccione el Modo gra deseado.
3
4
DOBLAJE
Lista doblaje
Sentido DVR DVD
Modo
XP
Selec programa
Inic doblaje
Utilice
Presione ENTER.
Aparecerá la Lista de programa.
/
para seleccionar “Selec programa”.
DOBLAJE
Lista progr. (Original)
Lista doblaje
1
Título 1
Título 2
Título 3
Título 4
Título 5
Título 6
Título 7
Título 8
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
143
Español
Grabación en DVR / DVD (Cont.)
Finalización
Utilice
Presione ENTER.
Aparecerá el Menú de Lista progr.
/
y seleccione un programa deseado.
5
6
VR
Video
DVD-R
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
Debe finalizar primero el disco antes de reproducirlo en
otra unidad.
Añad a lista doblaje
Playlist
Decid.
Presione SETUP.
1
2
Utilice
/
para seleccionar “Menú DVD”.
Presione ENTER.
Utilice
Presione ENTER.
El programa seleccionado se agregará a la Lista doblaje.
/
para seleccionar “Añad a lista doblaje”.
Utilice para seleccionar “Finalizar”.
Presione ENTER.
/
3
DOBLAJE
Aparecerá la ventana de confirmación.
Lista progr. (Original)
Lista doblaje
Título 2
1
Título 1
Título 2
Título 3
Título 4
Título 5
Título 6
Título 7
Título 8
2
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
¿Finaliz disco?
Sí
No
• Si ya finalizó el disco,“Anular Finalizar”
aparecerá en la lista en el menú en lugar de
“Finalizar” (sólo DVD-RW).Para anular la
finalización del disco,seleccione “Anular
Finalizar” y presione ENTER.
Repita los pasos 5 y 6 hasta que seleccione todos los
programas a doblar.
7
8
Utilice
Presione ENTER.
/
para seleccionar “Sí”.
4
5
Después de seleccionar todos los programas
deseados,presione RETURN
Menú Superior de Doblaje.
DOBLAJE
para volver al
Aparecerá la ventana de confirmación final.
Lista doblaje
¿Est Ud sseguro?
2
4
Título 2
Título 4
Sí
No
Sentido DVR DVD
Modo XP
Utilice
Presione ENTER.
Empezará la finalización.
/
para seleccionar “Sí”.
Selec programa
Inic doblaje
• Si desea parar el proceso,presione ENTER.
Utilice
Presione ENTER.
/
para seleccionar “Inic doblaje”.
9
Aparecerá la ventana de confirmación.
¿Iniciar doblaje?
Sí
No
Finalizar
Cancel
Utilice
Empezará el doblaje.
/
para seleccionar “Sí”.Presione ENTER.
10
Esta operación puede
demorar en reconocerse.
• Puede demorar en prepararse para el doblaje.
Para parar el doblaje durante el modo de
preparación de doblaje:
• Presione primero el Botón de Selección de Equipo
del medio de grabación y presione STOP C.O
presione STOP/EJECT
C
A en el panel delantero.
Para parar el doblaje en progreso:
• Presione primero el Botón de Selección de Equipo
del medio de grabación y mantenga presionado STOP
C
en el
durante 2 segundos,o presione STOP/EJECT
C
A
panel delantero.
144
Español
Reproducción de DVR / DVD
Antes de reproducir discos DVD,lea la siguiente información.
Discos que puede reproducir
Esta unidad es compatible para reproducir los
siguientes discos.
Los discos con los siguientes símbolos pueden reproducirse
en la unidad.No se garantiza la reproducción de otros tipos
de discos.
Sistemas de color
Los DVD se graban en diferentes sistemas de color en
diferentes regiones del mundo.El sistema de color más
común es NTSC (que se utiliza primariamente en los
Estados Unidos y Canadá).Esta unidad utiliza NTSC y los
DVD que reproduce deben grabarse en el sistema NTSC.
No puede reproducir DVD grabados en otro sistema de
color.
Discos
Símbolo
DVD-VIDEO
Códigos de región
Los DVD deben tener la etiqueta para todas las regiones o
para la Región 1.
Busque los siguientes símbolos en su DVD.
DVD-RW
(Modo deVIDEO/VR)
DVD-R
(Modo deVIDEO)
CD-DA
(AUDIO CD)
CD-RW
(Formato CD-DA,
archivos MP3 /WMA)
CD-R
(Formato CD-DA,
archivos MP3 /WMA)
es una marca registrada de DVD Format/Logo Licensing Corporation.
Reproduzca el contenido grabado
Puede seleccionar el título que desea reproducir de la Lista deTítulos.Puede acceder fácilmente a la Lista deTítulos
presionando TOP MENU.Puede llamar también los títulos grabados presionando PROGRAM RECORDINGS (sólo
la Lista Original del DVR).
Inicio de grab.
Parada/inicio
Parada grab.
¿Qué son títulos y capítulos?
El contenido del DVR / DVD se divide normalmente en títulos.Los títulos pueden
dividirse a su vez en capítulos.
Título 1
Título 2
Capítulo 1 Capítulo 2 Capítulo 3 Capítulo 1 Capítulo 2
¿Qué es una Lista Original y una Lista de reproducción?
A lo largo de este manual encontrará Lista Original y Lista de reproducción para
referirse al contenido Original y a la versión editada.(Vea la página 89.)
• Lista Original se refiere a lo que se grabó originalmente en el disco.
• Lista de reproducción se refiere a la versión editada del contenido Lista Original.
145
Español
Reproducción de DVR / DVD (Cont.)
Reproducción básica
VR
DVD-RW
Video
DVD-RW
DVD-R
CD
DVR
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
POWER
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
Si está reproduciendo DVR,presione primero DVR.
Si está reproduciendo un disco,presione primero DVD.
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
CHANNEL
Si está reproduciendo DVR,salte al paso 4.
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
1
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
Presione OPEN / CLOSE A para abrir la bandeja
del disco.
2
SPACE
0
Coloque el disco con su etiqueta hacia arriba. Alinee
el Disco con la guía de la bandeja del disco.
PROGRAM
3
SETUP
AUDIO
CLEAR
RECORDINGS
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
ENTER
guía de
bandeja
de disco
DISPLAY
RETURN
VARIABLE VARIABLE
REPLAY
SKIP
SKIP
Presione otra vez OPEN / CLOSE A para cerrar la
bandeja del disco.
REV
PLAY
FWD
Presione PLAY B para empezar a reproducir un CD.
Para la Reproducción DVR/DVD vaya al paso 4.
• Puede demorar en cargar el disco.
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
DVD
VCR
DVR
REC MONITOR
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
PresioneTOP MENU.
4
Aparecerá la lista de título.
Ejemplo:DVR
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
DVR DVD DVD
PL ORG PL
GRABAC. ANTERIORES
DVR
ORG
1
2
ABR/01 12:15PM CH12 XP
CH12 XP
1
2
5
3
6
ABR/01/06
12:15PM
MAY/01/06
12:15PM
JUN/04/06
10:00AM
4
JUN/15/06
11:05AM
JUL/05/06
11:40PM
JUL/18/06
10:00AM
Presione MENU / LIST para cambiar entre Lista
Original / Playlist si fuera necesario.
Utilice
/
/
/
para seleccionar un título
5
6
deseado y presione PLAY B.
Empezará la reproducción.
Presione STOP C para parar la reproducción.
146
Español
VCR
Grabación básica
VCR
TIMER
INPUT OPEN/CLOSE
Antes de grabar,asegúrese de que:
POWER
PROG. SELECT
EJECT
• Se seleccionó el canal deseado presionando los
botones numéricos o CHANNEL
Hay una cinta con la lengüeta para grabación intacta en la
unidad.
/
.
.@/:
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
•
CHANNEL
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
• Se selecciona el Modo gra deseado (SP:reproducción
normal o SLP:reproducción de larga duración)
presionando REC MODE en el control remoto.
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
Modo gra
Velocidad
de la cinta
SPACE
0
Tiempo de
grabación/reproducción
PROGRAM
T210
Tipo de cinta
Modo SP
T60
T120
2 horas 2-2/3 horas
6 horas 8 horas
T160
SETUP
AUDIO
CLEAR
RECORDINGS
3-1/2 horas
10-1/2 horas
1 hora
3 horas
Modo SLP
MENU/LIST
TOP MENU
•
Se selecciona Estéreo o SAP.
Presione primero VCR.
ENTER
DISPLAY
RETURN
Presione REC / OTR (VCR) para empezar la
grabación.
1
VARIABLE VARIABLE
REPLAY
SKIP
SKIP
Para parar temporalmente o seguir con la grabación,
presione PAUSE F.Después de que la unidad ha
estado en pausa durante cinco minutos,se parará
automáticamente para proteger la videocinta y la
cabeza de video contra daños.
REV
PLAY
FWD
SLOW
STOP
PAUSE
DVD
Presione STOP C cuando se complete la grabación.
VCR
DVR
REC MONITOR
2
REC MODE REC/OTR REC/OTR REC/OTR
Prevención contra borrado accidental
Para evitar una grabación por accidente en
un casete grabado,rompa la lengüeta de
grabación.Para volver a grabar posterior-
DUBBING MENU
SEARCH MODE
Lengüeta de
grabación
mente,cubra el orificio con cinta adhesiva.
Reproducción básica
VCR
Presione primero VCR.
Coloque una cinta pregrabada y presione PLAY
para empezar la reproducción.
B
1
• Si no tiene lengüeta para grabación,la reproducción
empieza automáticamente.
Durante la reproducción,presione PAUSE F.
2
Se hará una pausa de reproducción y se silenciará el
sonido.
OPEN
/
CLOSE
POWER
STOP/EJECT REW
F.FWD
PLAY
REC/OTR
CHANNEL
DUBBING
VCR
DVR
DVD
STOP
PLAY DVR REC/OTR DVD
VCR
DVD
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
Presione PLAY B para continuar la reproducción.
DVR
DVD
VCR
DVR/DVD
3
4
5
Presione STOP C para detener la reproducción.
POWER
STOP / EJECT C A
Presione STOP / EJECT C A en el panel delantero
de la unidad para expulsar la cinta.
147
LIMITED WARRANTY
FUNAI CORP. will repair this product, free of charge in the USA in the event of defect in materials or work-
manship as follows:
DURATION:
PARTS:
FUNAI CORP. will provide parts to replace defective parts without charge for one (1) year
from the date of original retail purchase. Certain parts are excluded from this warranty.
LABOR:
FUNAI CORP. will provide the labor without charge for a period of ninety (90) days from the
date of original retail purchase.
LIMITS AND EXCLUSIONS:
This warranty is extended only to the original retail purchaser. A purchase receipt or other proof of origi-
nal retail purchase will be required together with the product to obtain service under this warranty.
This warranty shall not be extended to any other person or transferee.
This warranty is void and of no effect if any serial numbers on the product are altered, replaced, defaced,
missing or if service was attempted by an unauthorized service center. This limited warranty does not
apply to any product not purchased and used in the United States.
This product is produced for home use and this warranty only covers failures due to defects in material or
workmanship which occurs during normal use. It does not cover damage which occurs in shipment, or fail-
ures which are caused by repairs, alterations or product not supplied by FUNAI CORP., or damage which
results from accident, misuse, abuse, mishandling, misapplication, alteration, faulty installation, improper
maintenance, commercial use such as hotel, rental or office use of this product or damage which results
from fire, flood, lightning or other acts of God.
THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER PACKING MATERIALS, ANY ACCESSORIES (EXCEPT
REMOTE CONTROL), ANY COSMETIC PARTS, COMPLETE ASSEMBLY PARTS, DEMO OR FLOOR
MODELS.
FUNAI CORP. AND ITS REPRESENTATIVES OR AGENTS SHALL IN NO EVENT BE LIABLE FOR ANY
GENERAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF OR OCCASIONED BY
THE USE OF OR THE INABILITY TO USE THIS PRODUCT. THIS WARRANTY IS MADE IN LIEU OF
ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, AND OF ALL OTHER LIABILITIES ON THE PART
OF FUNAI, ALL OTHER WARRANTIES INCLUDING THE WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE HEREBY DISCLAIMED BY FUNAI AND ITS
REPRESENTATIVES IN THE UNITED STATES. ALL WARRANTY INSPECTIONS AND REPAIRS MUST
BE PERFORMED BY AN AUTHORIZED SERVICE CENTER. THIS WARRANTY IS ONLY VALID WHEN
THE UNIT IS CARRIED-IN TO AN AUTHORIZED SERVICE CENTER.
IMPORTANT:
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS.YOU MAY HAVE OTHER RIGHTS
THAT VARY FROM STATE TO STATE. IF, AT ANY TIME DURING THE WARRANTY PERIOD, YOU ARE
UNABLE TO OBTAIN SATISFACTION WITH THE REPAIR OF THIS PRODUCT, PLEASE CONTACT
FUNAI CORP.
ATTENTION:
FUNAI CORP. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO MODIFY ANY DESIGN OF THIS PRODUCT WITHOUT
PRIOR NOTICE.
To locate your nearest AUTHORIZED SERVICE CENTER or for general service inquiries,
please contact us at:
FUNAI CORPORATION
Customer Service
Tel :1-800-605-8453
http://www.EmersonAudioVideo.com
19900 Van Ness Avenue, Torrance, CA 90501
Printed in China
1VMN22052
E434RUD★★★★★
|